# CommandSection

title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>smbnetfs</i> is a user-space utility that allows Linux systems to browse and access SMB/CIFS (Server Message Block/Common Internet File System) network shares. It operates as a Filesystem in Userspace (FUSE) module, dynamically discovering available workgroups, servers, and shares on the network and presenting them as a unified virtual directory structure at a specified mount point.<br><br>Users can navigate this virtual filesystem to explore network resources, and upon accessing a specific share, <i>smbnetfs</i> handles the underlying SMB/CIFS communication to make the remote share appear as a local directory. This command was useful for providing a 'network neighborhood' view before more robust kernel-level CIFS support (like <b>mount.cifs</b>) became prevalent, making it largely obsolete in modern systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>smbnetfs</i> is considered an <b>obsolete</b> utility on most modern Linux distributions. Its primary limitations include:<br><ul><li><b>Performance:</b> Being a FUSE-based user-space filesystem, it generally has lower performance compared to kernel-level CIFS implementations (like <b>mount.cifs</b>).</li><li><b>Discovery Reliability:</b> It relies on older NetBIOS browsing mechanisms for server and share discovery, which can be unreliable or slow in modern network environments, especially those relying heavily on DNS.</li><li><b>Maintenance:</b> It receives minimal to no active development, making it less robust and potentially less secure than current alternatives.</li><li><b>Authentication:</b> Authentication might need to be handled per-share or through less secure command-line password passing.</li></ul>


title: UNMOUNTING
content:
To unmount a filesystem mounted with <i>smbnetfs</i>, you should use the standard <b>umount</b> command, specifying the mount point: <b>umount</b> <i>/path/to/mountpoint</i>.


title: SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
content:
Providing sensitive information like passwords directly on the command line using the <b>password=</b> option is insecure, as it can be visible in process listings (e.g., via <b>ps</b>). For more secure authentication, consider using credentials files, though <i>smbnetfs</i>'s support for such mechanisms is limited compared to <b>mount.cifs</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>smbnetfs</i> emerged as part of the <b>smbfs</b> utilities package, providing an early method for Linux users to interact with SMB/CIFS networks through a user-friendly, browsable filesystem interface. It was developed to leverage FUSE (Filesystem in Userspace) at a time when kernel-level CIFS support was less mature. Its role was to abstract the complexities of network share discovery and access into a standard filesystem view. However, with the significant advancements and widespread adoption of the kernel-level <b>cifs</b> module and the <b>mount.cifs</b> utility, <i>smbnetfs</i> has been largely superseded due to its performance, reliability, and security limitations, becoming an obsolete tool in most contemporary Linux environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>smbpasswd</b> [<I>options</I>] [<I>username</I>]<br><br>General usage includes a combination of action flags and optional configuration settings:<br><b>smbpasswd</b> [<I>-a</I> | <I>-d</I> | <I>-e</I> | <I>-x</I> | <I>-m</I>] [<I>-n</I> | <I>-p</I>] [<I>-U username</I>] [<I>-D debuglevel</I>] [<I>-l logfile</I>] [<I>-s smb_file</I>] [<I>-c configfile</I>] [<I>username</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new user to the Samba password database. The user must typically already exist as a system user.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables a user's Samba account, preventing them from authenticating against Samba services.<br><br><b><b>-e</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables a user's Samba account, allowing them to authenticate against Samba services.<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes a user's account from the Samba password database. This does not remove the system user.<br><br><b><b>-m</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats the specified account as a machine account. This is used for adding or managing entries for client machines joining a Samba domain.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the specified user's password to null (empty). This can pose a significant security risk and should be used with extreme caution.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables 'pipe mode', causing <I>smbpasswd</I> to read the new password from standard input. This is useful for scripting password changes securely.<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <I>username</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the username on which the operation should be performed. If omitted, the current system user's Samba account is targeted.<br><br><b><b>-D</b> <I>debuglevel</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the debug level for the command's output. Higher numbers (0-10) produce more verbose logging for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <I>logfile</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the log file where debug messages and operational information will be written.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <I>smb_file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative <I>smb.conf</I> file to use instead of the default location. This can be useful for testing or specific configurations.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <I>configfile</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the Samba configuration file. This option is equivalent to <I>-s</I>.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message with command usage and available options, then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>smbpasswd</I> is a command-line utility provided by the <I>Samba</I> suite, essential for administering user and machine accounts within a Samba environment. Its primary function is to manage passwords stored in Samba's various authentication backends, such as <I>tdbsam</I>, <I>ldapsam</I>, or the legacy <I>smbpasswd</I> file.<br><br>Administrators use <I>smbpasswd</I> to add new users, delete existing accounts, enable or disable user access, and change passwords for users who need to access Samba shares, printers, or other services. Importantly, <I>smbpasswd</I> operates independently of the system's standard <I>passwd</I> command, meaning it manages passwords specifically for Samba's internal authentication system. It's a critical tool for ensuring seamless integration and authentication for Windows clients connecting to Linux/Unix servers running Samba.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <I>smbpasswd</I> to modify the Samba password database typically requires root privileges. It is crucial to understand that password changes made via <I>smbpasswd</I> generally <B>do not</B> synchronize with the user's system login password (stored in <I>/etc/shadow</I>). Therefore, a user might have different passwords for logging into the Linux system and accessing Samba shares. The actual password backend <I>smbpasswd</I> interacts with is determined by the <I>passdb backend</I> setting in your <I>smb.conf</I> file. Incorrect usage, especially with the <I>-n</I> option or improper handling in scripts, can introduce significant security vulnerabilities.


title: AUTHENTICATION BACKENDS
content:
<I>smbpasswd</I> primarily operates on Samba's internal password databases (e.g., <I>tdbsam</I>, <I>ldapsam</I>, or the traditional <I>smbpasswd</I> file). It does <B>not</B> manage passwords if your Samba configuration uses external authentication without a local Samba database, such as direct authentication against NIS, Winbind with Active Directory (without a local SAM), or if <I>unix password sync = yes</I> is configured to strictly rely on system passwords.


title: SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS FOR AUTOMATION
content:
When automating password changes using <I>smbpasswd</I>, it is critical to implement secure practices. Avoid passing passwords directly on the command line as they can be visible in process listings. Instead, utilize the <I>-p</I> (pipe mode) option, piping the password securely from a script or another command (e.g., <I>echo "new_password" | smbpasswd -s username</I>). Ensure that scripts handling passwords have appropriate file permissions and are only accessible by authorized personnel.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>smbpasswd</I> has been a fundamental utility within the <I>Samba</I> suite since its inception in the early 1990s. As <I>Samba</I> aimed to provide seamless file and print services compatible with Microsoft Windows on Unix-like operating systems, a dedicated method for managing user authentication was essential. Initially, <I>smbpasswd</I> was used to manage passwords in a simple flat-file database. With the evolution of <I>Samba</I> to support more sophisticated authentication backends, such as <I>tdbsam</I> (a TDB database) and <I>ldapsam</I> (for integration with LDAP or Active Directory), <I>smbpasswd</I> adapted to provide a consistent command-line interface across these different storage mechanisms. Its core function of managing local Samba user identities has remained central throughout its development.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>smbspool</b> <i>job-id user title copies options [file]</i><br><br>This synopsis represents its typical invocation by <I>CUPS</I> as a print backend. <b>smbspool</b> is generally not run directly by users.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>job-id</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The <I>CUPS</I> assigned job identification number for the print task.<br><br><b>user</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The username of the user who submitted the print job.<br><br><b>title</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The title or description of the print job.<br><br><b>copies</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specified number of copies to be printed.<br><br><b>options</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A string containing comma-separated <I>CUPS</I> print options. This often includes authentication details (e.g., 'auth-info-required=negotiate') and the destination printer (e.g., 'dest=printer@server').<br><br><b>[file]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. The path to the file containing the print data. If this argument is omitted, <b>smbspool</b> reads the print data from standard input (<I>stdin</I>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>smbspool</b> is a critical utility within the <I>Samba suite</I>, primarily designed to facilitate printing from Unix/Linux systems to printers shared via the <I>SMB/CIFS protocol</I>. It functions as a <I>CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) backend</I>. When a CUPS print job is directed to an <I>SMB printer</I>, CUPS invokes <b>smbspool</b> to handle the transmission of the print data. This involves managing the network connection, authenticating to the <I>SMB server</I>, and spooling the print job. It acts as the bridge, translating CUPS print requests into the appropriate SMB commands for remote printing. While its main role is as a CUPS helper, it can also be configured directly within <I>smb.conf</I> for specific print filtering scenarios. Its operation is largely transparent to the end-user, working behind the scenes to enable seamless network printing.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>smbspool</b> is a backend utility and not intended for direct user interaction. Its proper functioning heavily relies on the correct configuration of <I>Samba</I> (via <I>smb.conf</I>) and <I>CUPS</I>. Issues often stem from incorrect authentication details, network connectivity problems to the <I>SMB/CIFS server</I>, or misconfigured printer shares. Ensure the necessary Samba client binaries and libraries are installed and accessible.


title: CONFIGURATION WITH CUPS
content:
To use <b>smbspool</b> effectively, it must be configured as a backend for a printer queue within <I>CUPS</I>. This is typically done automatically when adding an <I>SMB printer</I> through the <I>CUPS web interface</I> or command-line tools. <I>CUPS</I> handles passing the necessary arguments (job ID, user, title, copies, options, and print data) to <b>smbspool</b>.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
<b>smbspool</b> handles the authentication process required to connect to the <I>SMB/CIFS share</I>. The authentication method (e.g., username/password, Kerberos, NTLM) is usually specified within the <I>CUPS printer URI</I> or via options passed from <I>CUPS</I>. Secure credential handling is crucial, and mechanisms like <I>CUPS's authentication backends</I> or <I>Samba's credential caching</I> are often employed.


title: HISTORY
content:
Part of the open-source <I>Samba project</I>, <b>smbspool</b> has evolved since the early 1990s as Samba developed robust <I>SMB/CIFS protocol</I> support for Unix-like systems. Its integration with <I>CUPS</I> became standard as <I>CUPS</I> emerged as the dominant printing system on Linux, solidifying <b>smbspool</b>'s role as the primary mechanism for printing to <I>Windows</I> and other <I>SMB-shared printers</I> from Unix environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-b</b>, <b>--brief</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a brief, summary-level output, reducing detail to focus on key information.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>debuglevel</i>, <b>--debuglevel=</b><i>debuglevel</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the debug level for the command's execution, useful for diagnosing issues. Default is 0.<br><br><b><b>-P</b>, <b>--profile</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays information gathered from the <b>smbd</b> profiling subsystem, if enabled.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--locked</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays information only for currently locked files, which is useful for troubleshooting file access issues.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--process</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists the process IDs (PIDs) of all active <b>smbd</b> processes handling client connections.<br><br><b><b>-S</b>, <b>--shares</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs a list of all currently active Samba shares and the users connected to them.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>username</i>, <b>--user=</b><i>username</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters the output to show information only for a specific <i>username</i>.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the output, providing more detailed information.<br><br><b><b>-x</b>, <b>--xml</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the status information in a machine-readable XML format, ideal for scripting and automation.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--full</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a full, detailed output. This is the default behavior if no other options are specified.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>smbstatus</b> command is a crucial diagnostic and monitoring tool for Samba administrators. It provides a real-time overview of the current status of the Samba server (<b>smbd</b>). This includes a list of active SMB/CIFS connections, detailing connected users, their associated process IDs (PIDs), and the shares they are accessing. Beyond just connections, <b>smbstatus</b> also enumerates all currently open files, indicating which user has them open and on which share. Furthermore, it's invaluable for identifying file locks, helping to troubleshoot access issues or understand resource contention. By displaying information on active users, shared files, and locks, administrators can effectively monitor server usage, identify rogue processes, resolve file access conflicts, and ensure the smooth operation of their Samba file services.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command typically requires root privileges or sufficient permissions to access Samba's internal state files. Output can be extensive on busy servers, potentially impacting terminal readability. Information is real-time but reflects the state at the moment of execution.


title: OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
By default, <b>smbstatus</b> presents human-readable tables detailing connections, open files, and locks. However, the <b>-x</b> (<b>--xml</b>) option allows for output in XML format, which is invaluable for programmatic parsing and integration into monitoring scripts or custom dashboards. This flexibility makes it a powerful tool for both manual inspection and automated system health checks.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
Administrators frequently use <b>smbstatus</b> to:<br><i>1. Identify active users and their shares.</i><br><i>2. Troubleshoot 'file in use' errors by locating specific file locks.</i><br><i>3. Monitor server load by observing the number of active connections.</i><br><i>4. Debug Samba configurations by checking active shares and user access.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>smbstatus</b> is an integral part of the Samba suite, a free software re-implementation of the SMB/CIFS networking protocol, originally developed in the early 1990s. As Samba evolved to provide robust file and print services across heterogeneous networks, <b>smbstatus</b> emerged as a vital administrative tool to inspect the operational status and resource usage of the Samba daemon (<b>smbd</b>). Its development tracked Samba's own, focusing on providing administrators clear insights into active connections and shared resources.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>smbta-util</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;options&gt;</i>]<br><br>Common commands include:<br> &nbsp; <b>smbta-util</b> <b>check-consistency</b> [<i>&lt;options&gt;</i>]<br> &nbsp; <b>smbta-util</b> <b>repl-sync</b> [<i>&lt;options&gt;</i>]<br> &nbsp; <b>smbta-util</b> <b>domain-status</b> [<i>&lt;options&gt;</i>]<br> &nbsp; <b>smbta-util</b> <b>dc-health</b> [<i>&lt;options&gt;</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>check-consistency</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs an integrity and consistency check of the Samba AD database. This helps identify issues like orphaned records or replication discrepancies.<br><br><b><b>repl-sync</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces immediate replication synchronization with other domain controllers. Useful for ensuring data consistency across multiple DCs.<br><br><b><b>domain-status</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current status and health information of the Samba Active Directory domain.<br><br><b><b>dc-health</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a series of health checks on the local Samba AD Domain Controller, assessing services, replication, and overall operational status.<br><br><b><b>--realm=</b><i>&lt;realm&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Kerberos realm to which the AD DC belongs. Often inferred or set by default.<br><br><b><b>--target=</b><i>&lt;target_dc&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target Domain Controller for operations like replication synchronization or health checks.<br><br><b><b>--username=</b><i>&lt;username&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the administrative username to use for authentication against the AD DC.<br><br><b><b>--password=</b><i>&lt;password&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the password for the given username. For security, it's often better to omit this and let the command prompt for it.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the command output, providing more detailed information during execution.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message for the <i>smbta-util</i> command or its specific subcommands.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>smbta-util</i> command is a utility within the Samba suite designed for advanced administration and troubleshooting of a Samba Active Directory Domain Controller (AD DC). It provides functionalities to interact with the internal Samba AD database, perform consistency checks, manage replication, and monitor the health of the domain controller. It is particularly useful for diagnosing and resolving issues related to AD database integrity, SYSVOL replication, and Kerberos secret synchronization within a Samba AD environment. This command is typically used by system administrators managing a Samba-based Active Directory infrastructure.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command requires administrative privileges (root or a user with sufficient permissions within the Samba AD domain). It should only be used by experienced administrators, as incorrect usage, particularly with replication commands, can lead to data inconsistencies or service disruption within the Active Directory domain. It is specific to Samba AD DC environments and is not applicable to standalone Samba servers or other directory services.


title: AUTHENTICATION REQUIREMENT
content:
Many operations with <i>smbta-util</i>, especially those modifying the AD database or forcing replication, require authentication as an administrative user within the Samba AD domain. This can be done via Kerberos tickets (using <i>kinit</i>) or by explicitly providing <i>--username</i> and <i>--password</i> arguments.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
Typical use cases include diagnosing replication failures between Samba AD DCs, verifying database integrity after a crash or power outage, forcing replication sync for specific directory partitions, and generally monitoring the health of the AD environment to preempt issues.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>smbta-util</i> was introduced as part of the Samba 4.x series, specifically with the full implementation of Active Directory Domain Controller capabilities. It provides an essential set of tools for managing the internal state of the Samba AD database, which became necessary with Samba's role as a complete AD DC, handling complex replication and consistency requirements that went beyond traditional file and print services.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>smbtar</I> <B>//server/share</B> <B>{-c | -x | -t}</B> [<I>smbtar_options</I>] [<I>tar_options</I>] <br><I>smbtar</I> <B>-s //server/share</B> <B>{-c | -x | -t}</B> [<I>smbtar_options</I>] [<I>tar_options</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a new archive (backup mode). Files from the SMB share are written to the tar archive.<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extract files from an archive (restore mode). Files are read from the tar archive and written to the local filesystem.<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List the contents of an archive. Displays the names of files in the tar archive.<br><br><b>-s //server/share</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the SMB share to connect to for backup or restore. This can also be provided as the first argument without the '-s' flag.<br><br><b>-u <username></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the username for authenticating to the SMB share.<br><br><b>-p <password></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the password for the SMB username. If omitted, smbtar will prompt for it securely.<br><br><b>-N <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform an incremental backup. Only files newer than the timestamp stored in <file> will be backed up. The timestamp in <file> is updated after a successful backup.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with -N, indicates an archive (full) backup. Resets the timestamp in the file specified by -N to the current time, ensuring a full backup next time.<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force incremental backup, even if the state file (-N) does not exist or is empty. A full backup will be performed if no state file is found.<br><br><b>-E <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude files listed in <file> from the backup. Each line in <file> is treated as a pattern (glob) to exclude.<br><br><b>-r <remote path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a remote directory on the SMB share to start the backup or restore operation from. Defaults to the root of the specified share.<br><br><b>-D <local directory></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Change to <local directory> before extracting files during a restore operation. This affects where extracted files are placed on the local system.<br><br><b>-T <tar command></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the full path to the tar binary to use. Defaults to 'tar', but can be useful for specifying 'gtar' or other specific versions.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output, displaying more details about the operation, including files being processed.<br><br><b>-d <debug level></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the debug level for smbclient operations (0-10). Higher numbers provide more detailed output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-l <log file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a file to write debug messages to, instead of standard error.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>smbtar</I> is a shell script that acts as a wrapper around the <I>smbclient</I> and <I>tar</I> utilities, designed to facilitate backups of files and directories from SMB/CIFS network shares. It provides a convenient way to automate the process of connecting to a remote Windows or Samba share, listing its contents, and then piping those contents directly to <I>tar</I> for archiving. This allows users to create archives (e.g., to a local disk, tape drive, or another remote location via a pipe) without first mounting the remote share locally.<br><br>It handles authentication against the SMB share and supports various <I>tar</I> options for compression, verbosity, and specifying archive destinations. <I>smbtar</I> is particularly useful in mixed environments where Linux systems need to back up data residing on Windows servers or other Samba-enabled network-attached storage, offering a scriptable and non-interactive backup solution.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>smbtar</I> is a shell script, meaning its performance can be limited compared to compiled binaries, especially with very large numbers of files due to overheads in file listing via <I>smbclient</I>. It relies heavily on the correct functioning and presence of both <I>smbclient</I> and <I>tar</I> utilities on the local system.<br><br>Authentication challenges, such as special characters in passwords or complex domain authentication schemes, can sometimes be problematic. Permissions and extended attributes on files transferred via SMB may not be fully preserved or restored accurately, as SMB's capabilities differ from local Unix file systems. For modern backup strategies, direct <I>rsync</I> over SMB (if supported) or mounting shares with <I>mount.cifs</I> and then using <I>tar</I> or <I>rsync</I> directly might offer more flexibility or performance.


title: HOW IT WORKS INTERNALLY
content:
<I>smbtar</I> operates by piping the output of an <I>smbclient</I> command directly into the standard input of the <I>tar</I> command. For a backup operation (<B>-c</B>), <I>smbclient</I> is instructed to list and get files from the remote share, and this data stream is consumed by <I>tar</I> to create an archive. For a restore operation (<B>-x</B>), <I>tar</I> extracts files from an archive (typically from standard input or a specified file), and these files are then sent via <I>smbclient</I> to the remote share using the 'put' command.


title: INTEGRATION WITH TAR OPTIONS
content:
Beyond its own specific options, <I>smbtar</I> seamlessly passes almost all other command-line arguments directly to the underlying <I>tar</I> command. This allows users to leverage <I>tar</I>'s extensive features, such as compression (e.g., <B>-z</B> for gzip, <B>-j</B> for bzip2, <B>-J</B> for xz), specifying an archive file (e.g., <B>-f /path/to/archive.tar.gz</B>), and verbosity settings, making <I>smbtar</I> highly flexible for various backup requirements. For instance, <B>smbtar //server/share -c -z -f /backup/share.tar.gz</B> would create a compressed gzip tar archive.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>smbtar</I> originated as part of the Samba suite, a collection of free software implementations of SMB/CIFS protocols. Its development dates back to the early days of Samba, providing a crucial utility for performing network backups from Unix/Linux systems to and from Windows and other SMB/CIFS file servers. In an era when direct mounting of SMB shares was less common or robust, <I>smbtar</I> offered a reliable method to stream data.<br><br>While newer tools and methods (like direct file copying with <I>rsync</I> over mounted CIFS shares) have emerged, <I>smbtar</I> remains a functional and often relied-upon script for straightforward network backups in heterogeneous environments, maintaining its place within the Samba distribution for compatibility and ease of use in specific scenarios.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-N</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not ask for a password. Useful for anonymous browsing of shares.<br><br><b>-U <username>[%<password>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the username and optionally password to use for authentication. If password is not provided, it will be prompted interactively.<br><br><b>-W <workgroup></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the workgroup or domain to which the username provided with -U belongs.<br><br><b>-S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List only servers (not shares or domains/workgroups).<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List only domains/workgroups (not servers or shares).<br><br><b>-P</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Probe all shares to determine if they are print shares. Can be slow.<br><br><b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Broadcast on all interfaces to find shares. Useful for discovering services across different subnets.<br><br><b>-I <IP address></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the specified IP address directly, bypassing NetBIOS name resolution for the target.<br><br><b>-n <NetBIOS name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the specified NetBIOS name of a server or domain.<br><br><b>-T <tree level></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the tree level of detail to display. Higher numbers show more detail (e.g., -T 1 for workgroups, -T 2 for servers, -T 3 for shares).<br><br><b>-d <debug level></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the debug (log) level. Ranges from 0 (no debug) to 10 (full debug).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>smbtree</b></i> is a command-line utility from the Samba suite that allows users to explore network resources using the SMB/CIFS protocol. It displays a hierarchical tree structure of the network, showing workgroups or domains, the servers within them, and the shared resources (disks, printers) available on those servers. This tool is invaluable for network administrators and users to discover available shares without needing to map them directly, providing a quick overview of accessible network assets. It relies on NetBIOS over TCP/IP to discover services and can be used to list anonymous shares or those requiring specific user credentials.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires Samba client tools to be installed on the Linux system.<br>Network connectivity to the target SMB/CIFS servers is essential, and relevant firewall ports (137/udp, 138/udp, 139/tcp, 445/tcp) must be open.<br>Authentication is often required to view resources beyond publicly accessible shares.<br>Can be slow on large or poorly configured networks due to reliance on broadcast lookups for discovery.


title: USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
To list all shares in your current workgroup/domain without a password prompt (if anonymous access is allowed), you can simply run: <br><code>smbtree -N</code><br>To list shares on a specific server named "MYSERVER" using a username "myuser": <br><code>smbtree -n MYSERVER -U myuser</code><br>You will then be prompted for the password for "myuser".


title: OUTPUT STRUCTURE
content:
The output is typically an ASCII tree, showing the network hierarchy. A common path would be: <br><code>\WORKGROUP_OR_DOMAIN\SERVER_NAME\SHARE_NAME</code><br>Shared resources are usually prefixed to indicate their type, such as '<i>Disk</i>' for file shares and '<i>Printer</i>' for print shares.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>smbtree</b></i> is an integral part of the Samba suite, an open-source implementation of the SMB/CIFS networking protocol for Unix-like operating systems. Samba was initially developed by Andrew Tridgell in 1992 to allow Unix machines to share files with Microsoft Windows.<br><i><b>smbtree</b></i> emerged as a utility within this suite to provide command-line network browsing capabilities, offering a text-based alternative to Windows' graphical "Network Neighborhood" or "Network" browsing. Its development has mirrored Samba's evolution, maintaining compatibility with various Windows and SMB server versions over the decades.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display totals for all memory columns at the end of the report.<br><br><b>-s <I>KEY</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort the output by a specified column key. Common keys include 'pss', 'rss', 'uss', 'name', or 'pid'.<br><br><b>-k</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output memory sizes in kilobytes (KB). This is the default unit.<br><br><b>-m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output memory sizes in megabytes (MB).<br><br><b>-g</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output memory sizes in gigabytes (GB).<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display memory sizes as percentages of total system memory.<br><br><b>-c <I>COLUMNS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a comma-separated list of columns to display. Examples: 'pid,user,command,pss,rss,uss'.<br><br><b>-P <I>PATTERN</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter processes by a regular expression pattern matching the command name.<br><br><b>-u <I>PATTERN</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter processes by a regular expression pattern matching the username.<br><br><b>--group</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Group processes by their command name, showing combined memory usage for each group.<br><br><b>--user-group</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Group processes by user, showing combined memory usage for each user.<br><br><b>--abbrev</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Abbreviate long command names for cleaner output.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information of <b>smem</b>.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>smem</b> is a command-line utility designed to report physical memory usage on a Linux system, with a particular focus on accurately accounting for shared memory.<br>Unlike traditional tools like <b>ps</b> or <b>top</b>, which often over-report memory usage by counting shared pages multiple times, <b>smem</b> introduces the concept of Proportional Set Size (PSS).<br><br>It provides three key memory metrics:<br><ul><li><b><I>RSS (Resident Set Size)</I></b>: The total physical memory used by a process, including shared libraries. Shared memory is counted for each process that uses it.</li><li><b><I>USS (Unique Set Size)</I></b>: The amount of physical memory that is exclusively used by a process and not shared with any other process.</li><li><b><I>PSS (Proportional Set Size)</I></b>: The total physical memory used by a process, where shared memory is divided proportionally among the processes that use it. PSS is generally considered the most accurate representation of a process's actual memory footprint.<br></li></ul><b>smem</b> is invaluable for system administrators and developers needing to diagnose memory leaks, understand true application memory consumption, or optimize system resource usage by identifying processes with significant shared memory.<br>It allows for flexible output formatting, filtering by process name or user, and sorting results based on various memory metrics.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>smem</b> typically requires root privileges or appropriate permissions to access comprehensive memory information for all processes on the system.<br>It can be more resource-intensive than simpler tools like <b>ps</b> or <b>top</b>, especially on systems with a very large number of processes, as it gathers detailed per-process memory statistics.<br><b>smem</b> may not be pre-installed on all Linux distributions and might require installation via the distribution's package manager.


title: UNDERSTANDING PSS, RSS, AND USS
content:
The distinction between PSS, RSS, and USS is fundamental to understanding <b>smem</b>'s value.<br><b><I>RSS</I></b> (Resident Set Size) is straightforward: it's the total memory a process has in RAM, including shared pages. However, summing RSS values across all processes can lead to greatly inflated total memory usage because shared pages are counted for every process that uses them.<br><b><I>USS</I></b> (Unique Set Size) is the opposite extreme: it only counts memory pages that are exclusive to a process, ignoring all shared memory.<br><b><I>PSS</I></b> (Proportional Set Size) strikes a balance. It allocates shared memory pages proportionally among the processes that share them. For example, if two processes share a 10MB page, each process's PSS would include 5MB of that page. This makes PSS the most accurate metric for understanding a process's true contribution to overall system memory consumption, as summing PSS values for all processes will approximate the total physical memory in use.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>smem</b> utility was developed to address a significant limitation in traditional Linux memory reporting tools (like <b>ps</b> and <b>top</b>) which often overestimate total memory usage due to their simplistic handling of shared memory.<br>It introduces the Proportional Set Size (PSS) metric, offering a more accurate and realistic view of how much physical RAM processes genuinely consume.<br>Part of the `smem` project, it has been a valuable tool for detailed memory analysis in Linux environments since its inception, providing insights crucial for performance tuning and resource management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>openssl smime</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>input_file</i>]<br><br>Common operations include:<br><i>openssl smime -sign</i> ...<br><i>openssl smime -verify</i> ...<br><i>openssl smime -encrypt</i> ...<br><i>openssl smime -decrypt</i> ...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-sign</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Signs the message using the provided certificate and private key.<br><br><b>-verify</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verifies a signed message, checking the signature and certificate chain.<br><br><b>-encrypt <cipher></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Encrypts the message using the specified cipher algorithm (e.g., des3, aes256).<br><br><b>-decrypt</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decrypts an encrypted S/MIME message using the recipient's private key.<br><br><b>-in <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input file for the S/MIME operation. Defaults to standard input.<br><br><b>-out <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file for the result. Defaults to standard output.<br><br><b>-signer <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Certificate of the signer in PEM format (for `-sign`).<br><br><b>-recip <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recipient's certificate for decryption (for `-decrypt`).<br><br><b>-inkey <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Private key file to use for signing or decryption.<br><br><b>-passin <arg></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Source for the private key's passphrase (e.g., 'pass:mypass', 'file:key.pass').<br><br><b>-inform <fmt></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Input format for certificates or PKCS#7 structures (PEM, DER, SMIME).<br><br><b>-outform <fmt></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output format for the resulting S/MIME message or data (PEM, DER, SMIME).<br><br><b>-md <digest></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Message digest algorithm to use for signing (e.g., sha256, sha512).<br><br><b>-binary</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables MIME canonicalization; useful for processing raw binary data.<br><br><b>-text</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds text/plain MIME content type to output and canonicalizes line endings to CRLF.<br><br><b>-nodetach</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produce an opaque (embedded) signature instead of a detached one (for `-sign`).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `smime` command, part of the OpenSSL toolkit, is a versatile utility for processing S/MIME (Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) messages. It implements the Cryptographic Message Syntax (CMS) standard, defined in RFC 5652, which is a superset of the older PKCS#7 standard.<br><br>This command enables various cryptographic operations crucial for secure communication: <b>signing</b> messages to provide digital signatures for integrity and non-repudiation; <b>verifying</b> signatures to ensure message authenticity; <b>encrypting</b> messages for confidentiality; and <b>decrypting</b> previously encrypted data. It can read input from standard input or a specified file and write output to standard output or a designated file.<br><br>`smime` is widely used for securing email communications but is also applicable for general data security where CMS-formatted data is required. It leverages X.509 certificates and private keys, making it an essential tool in PKI-enabled environments for handling encrypted and signed content.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using `smime` requires a solid understanding of cryptographic concepts, X.509 certificates, and private key management. Misconfiguration of certificates or keys can lead to verification failures or inability to decrypt messages. The command's flexibility means many options, which can be overwhelming for new users. Ensure proper handling of passphrases and secure storage of private keys.


title: PKI MODEL
content:
Unlike PGP's 'web of trust', S/MIME relies on a hierarchical Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) where X.509 certificates are typically issued and validated by Certificate Authorities (CAs).


title: DETACHED VS. OPAQUE SIGNATURES
content:
A <b>detached signature</b> (default for `-sign`) keeps the original content separate from the signature, often sent as a multipart message. An <b>opaque signature</b> (with `-nodetach`) embeds the content within the signed message, making it a single self-contained unit.


title: HISTORY
content:
The `smime` command in OpenSSL is a long-standing utility for handling S/MIME messages, evolving with the CMS standard (RFC 5652). It provides a command-line interface to OpenSSL's underlying cryptographic libraries, making it indispensable for script-based automation and integration in secure messaging workflows. Its roots trace back to the need for interoperable secure email and data exchange standards, with OpenSSL providing one of the most robust and widely adopted open-source implementations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-display</b> <i>display</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to connect to. This is typically set by the environment variable DISPLAY and usually not needed.<br><br><b><b>-geometry</b> <i>geometry</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the initial geometry for the proxy window. Note: The man page states this option is currently ignored.<br><br><b><b>-id</b> <i>SM_ID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X session management ID to use. This is primarily for internal use when the session manager is orchestrating the proxy.<br><br><b><b>-restore</b> <i>SM_FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a file from which to restore the session. This is used when the session manager requests the proxy to restore its state.<br><br><b><b>-proxy</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables proxy mode. This is the default behavior and usually not explicitly needed.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints a short help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>smproxy</b> command acts as an intermediary for X applications that do not directly support the <I>X Session Management Protocol (XSMP)</I>. In the X Window System, a session manager (like part of GNOME, KDE, or Xfce desktop environments) uses XSMP to save and restore the state of applications during session shutdowns or restarts.<br><br>Many older or simpler X applications were not designed with XSMP in mind. Without <b>smproxy</b>, these applications would not be able to participate in session management, leading to them being abruptly terminated during a session shutdown or not being reopened correctly on session restoration. <b>smproxy</b> registers itself with the session manager and then effectively 'wraps' the non-XSMP application, translating session management requests into actions the wrapped application understands (like sending a SIGHUP or SIGTERM for shutdown, or restarting the application with specific arguments for restoration). It ensures that even legacy applications can be gracefully managed within a modern X session.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>-geometry</b> option is documented to be ignored. <b>smproxy</b> is primarily useful for applications that predate or do not implement <I>X Session Management Protocol (XSMP)</I>. Modern X applications are expected to handle XSMP directly, making <b>smproxy</b> less critical for newly developed software. Its role is often as a compatibility layer.


title: X SESSION MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL (XSMP)
content:
<I>XSMP</I> is a protocol that allows applications to communicate with a session manager about their state. This includes requests to save their current state, restore a previous state, or prepare for shutdown. <b>smproxy</b> allows non-XSMP applications to indirectly participate in this protocol by acting on their behalf.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>smproxy</b> is a component of the <I>X Session Management Library (libSM)</I> and <I>X Session Management Protocol (XSMP)</I> tools, which were introduced to provide a standardized way for X applications to participate in session management (saving/restoring state, handling shutdowns). It emerged to bridge the gap for the large existing base of X applications that predated XSMP, allowing them to integrate into desktop environments that adopted the protocol. Its presence ensures backward compatibility and graceful handling of diverse X client types within a unified desktop session.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>sn</b> is not recognized as a standard or commonly available utility in typical Linux distributions.<br>This means there is no pre-defined functionality, syntax, or set of options associated with it in a general Linux environment.<br>If you have encountered <b>sn</b>, it is highly probable that it is a custom shell script, an alias configured in a specific user's environment, or a component of a specialized software package or a niche operating system.<br>Therefore, a detailed analysis of its standard usage, parameters, and history cannot be provided.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command is not part of standard Linux toolsets. If <b>sn</b> was encountered in a specific context, it is likely a custom script, an alias, or a command from a non-standard package.<br>Its functionality would depend entirely on its implementation in that specific environment, which is outside the scope of general Linux command analysis.<br>It is important to verify the source and purpose of any non-standard commands before execution.


title: IMPORTANT NOTE
content:
Please verify the command name.<br>It is possible that <b>sn</b> is a typo, or it might be an abbreviation or part of a larger command (e.g., <i>snmpwalk</i>, <i>snap</i>, <i>snprintf</i>).<br>If it refers to a command within a specific application or framework, please provide the correct or full command name for accurate analysis.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>N/A</i> - As <b>sn</b> is not a standard or widely adopted command, there is no public history of its development or general usage in the broader Linux ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the game to "fast" mode, increasing the snake's movement speed.<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables "tagged" mode, often displaying debugging information or internal game states (less common for typical user play).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>snake</i> command typically invokes a simple, text-based implementation of the classic arcade game "Snake" (also known as "Nibbler" or "Worm"). In this game, the player controls a snake on a grid, guiding it to eat "food" items. Each time the snake consumes food, it grows longer. The objective is to eat as much food as possible without colliding with the boundaries of the playing area or with the snake's own tail. The game is usually played in a terminal using arrow keys for movement. Its simplicity and addictive nature have made it a popular pastime and a common example of ncurses programming.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>snake</i> command is not a standard Linux utility but typically a simple game. Its availability and specific implementation (e.g., options, controls, appearance) can vary significantly depending on the Linux distribution and the package it comes from (e.g., bsdgames, ncurses-examples, or a custom script). Users might need to install a package like <b>bsdgames</b> to access it.


title: CONTROLS
content:
Movement is typically controlled using the arrow keys (Up, Down, Left, Right). Pressing 'q' or 'Q' often quits the game.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
On many Debian/Ubuntu-based systems, the <i>snake</i> game can be installed via the <b>bsdgames</b> package: sudo apt install bsdgames. On Fedora/RHEL, it might be part of <b>ncurses-examples</b> or similar packages.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of the "snake" game dates back to the 1970s, with "Blockade" (1976) by Gremlin Industries often cited as the first arcade version. It gained widespread popularity with the release of "Snake" on Nokia mobile phones in the late 1990s, becoming a cultural phenomenon. On Unix-like systems, various open-source implementations have existed for decades, often using the ncurses library to render the game in the terminal, serving as both entertainment and a common programming example.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snake4</i> is a classic arcade-style game designed for the Linux terminal. The primary objective is to control a 'snake' that continuously moves across the screen, consuming 'food' items. Each successful consumption of food makes the snake grow longer, increasing the challenge. Players must skillfully navigate the snake to avoid collisions with the game's boundaries (walls) and, crucially, with the snake's own ever-growing body. The game typically utilizes simple text-based graphics, often rendered through libraries like <i>ncurses</i>, to provide an interactive and responsive gameplay experience. It functions as a single-player game, focused on achieving the highest possible score by maximizing the snake's length before an inevitable collision ends the round. Its straightforward mechanics and nostalgic appeal make it a popular, lighthearted utility on Unix-like operating systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command requires a terminal emulator that supports <i>ncurses</i> for proper display and interaction. As a text-based game, it does not offer graphical interface options.<br>It is designed for single-player use only and generally lacks advanced features such as multiplayer modes, custom level editors, or persistent high score tracking across different sessions.


title: GAMEPLAY CONTROLS
content:
The snake's movement direction is typically controlled using the standard arrow keys: Up, Down, Left, and Right. The game usually commences immediately upon execution of the <b>snake4</b> command.<br>To exit the game at any point, players can generally press the 'q' or 'Q' key.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of the Snake game originated in the 1970s with arcade titles like <i>Blockade</i>, gaining widespread popularity on early home computers and later on mobile phones. The <i>snake4</i> command, along with many other terminal-based games, represents a common adaptation or re-implementation of this timeless classic for Unix-like systems. It is frequently found as part of broader game packages (like <i>bsdgames</i> on various Linux distributions) or developed as a straightforward C/C++ program to showcase <i>ncurses</i> library functionalities. Its evolution has primarily focused on providing a simple, functional, and enjoyable rendition of the classic game within the confines of a terminal environment.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snake4scores</b> command is a utility specifically designed to display the high scores recorded during gameplay of the classic terminal-based snake game, <i>snake4</i>. It typically reads score data from a designated score file, often located in a system-wide or user-specific directory, and presents it to the user. The output usually lists scores in descending order, showing the player's name, their score, and potentially the date the score was achieved. This command provides a simple way for players to view their achievements and compete with others, reinforcing the game's replayability.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>snake4scores</b> command is not a standard core Linux utility and is only available if the <i>snake4</i> game package (sometimes bundled as <i>ncurses-snake</i> or similar) is installed on your system. Its functionality is entirely dependent on the game's score-saving mechanism, and the location of the score file may vary depending on the system's package management and installation paths. If the game has not been played or no scores have been saved, the output will likely be empty or indicate no scores found.


title: SCORE FILE LOCATION
content:
The scores displayed by <b>snake4scores</b> are typically stored in a plain text file, often with a simple line-by-line format (e.g., 'NAME SCORE DATE'). Common locations for this score file include <i>/var/games/snake4/scores</i> for system-wide high scores or <i>~/.snake4_scores</i> for user-specific scores. The exact path can vary based on the game's installation and distribution-specific packaging.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>snake4scores</b> command's history is directly tied to the development and evolution of the <i>snake4</i> game itself. As a simple, terminal-based game, <i>snake4</i> (and by extension its score utility) has been a popular inclusion in many Linux distributions and BSD variants for decades, often serving as a demonstration of <i>ncurses</i> capabilities or just a fun diversion. Its basic functionality for displaying scores has remained largely consistent, reflecting the straightforward nature of high score management in such games, adapting only to minor changes in file paths or game versions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's help message and exit.<br><br><b>-c, --check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't write the files back, just return the status. Return code 0 means nothing would change. Return code 1 means some files would be reformatted. Return code 123 means there was an internal error.<br><br><b>-d, --diff</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't write the files back, just print unified diffs to stdout.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print more information, like the names of files being reformatted and why.<br><br><b>-l, --line-length <int></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;How many characters per line to allow. Defaults to 88.<br><br><b>--target-version {py36,py37,py38,py39,py310,py311}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Python versions that should be supported by Black's output. (This is for the underlying Black formatter).<br><br><b>--skip-version-check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't fail if the Black and isort versions used by <i>snakefmt</i> do not match your installed ones.<br><br><b>--style <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to a <i>pyproject.toml</i> containing <i>snakefmt</i>, <i>black</i> and <i>isort</i> config.<br><br><b>--config <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read configuration from <i>PATH</i> (e.g., <i>pyproject.toml</i>).<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the version and exit.<br><br><b>--force-exclusion</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't respect <i>.snakefmt</i> and <i>.gitignore</i> exclude patterns.<br><br><b>--list-files</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the names of files that would be formatted.<br><br><b>--stdin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read Snakemake code from stdin and print formatted code to stdout.<br><br><b>--single-quote</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use single quotes for strings where appropriate (for Black).<br><br><b>--fmt-error-on-diff</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Return 1 if there's any diff, even if no formatting changes occurred (e.g., just whitespace).<br><br><b>--fmt-error-on-change</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Return 1 if any file was changed due to formatting.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snakefmt</i> is an opinionated code formatter specifically designed for Snakemake workflows. It aims to provide a consistent and readable style across all Snakemake files by automatically reformatting them according to a predefined set of rules.<br><br>It leverages the formatting power of popular Python formatters like <b>Black</b> and <b>isort</b> to handle Python code blocks within Snakemake rules, while also applying specific formatting for Snakemake's unique syntax (e.g., rule definitions, input/output sections, shell commands).<br><br>By automating the formatting process, <i>snakefmt</i> helps reduce cognitive load during code reviews, minimizes style-related disagreements, and improves the overall maintainability and readability of Snakemake projects. It can be used to format individual files, directories, or even standard input, and offers options for checking formatting without applying changes, showing differences, and controlling line length.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>snakefmt</i> is designed exclusively for Snakemake workflows and does not format arbitrary Python files. While it uses <b>Black</b> and <b>isort</b> internally, its primary focus is on Snakemake-specific syntax.<br><br>It relies on a <i>pyproject.toml</i> file for project-specific configurations, which might require some initial setup. Although <i>snakefmt</i> aims for idempotence (running it multiple times on the same code yields the same result), unexpected interactions with other linters or manual edits might sometimes require running it again.


title: INTEGRATION WITH CI/CD
content:
<i>snakefmt</i> can be easily integrated into Continuous Integration/Continuous Delivery (CI/CD) pipelines to automatically enforce code style on every commit or pull request. Using the <b>--check</b> or <b>--diff</b> flags, CI/CD systems can verify that all Snakemake files adhere to the defined formatting rules before merging code, preventing unformatted code from entering the main codebase.


title: OPINIONATED FORMATTING
content:
Like <b>Black</b>, <i>snakefmt</i> is opinionated, meaning it makes most formatting decisions for you, reducing configuration overhead and style debates. While some options like <b>line-length</b> are configurable, the core formatting logic is fixed, ensuring high consistency across projects.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>snakefmt</i> was created to address the lack of a dedicated formatter for Snakemake workflows, which often contain a mix of Snakemake-specific syntax and Python code. Prior to its development, formatting Snakemake files was largely a manual effort or relied on generic Python formatters that couldn't handle Snakemake's unique structure.<br><br>By integrating and adapting the robust formatting capabilities of <b>Black</b> and <b>isort</b>, <i>snakefmt</i> provides an automated and opinionated solution for maintaining consistent style, making Snakemake code more readable and easier to collaborate on. Its development filled a crucial gap in the Snakemake ecosystem, promoting best practices for code style.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snap</b> [<i>global-options</i>] &lt;<i>command</i>&gt; [<i>command-options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br>Common usage examples:<br><b>snap install</b> <i>&lt;snap-name&gt;</i><br><b>snap remove</b> <i>&lt;snap-name&gt;</i><br><b>snap list</b><br><b>snap refresh</b> <i>&lt;snap-name&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>install <snap_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Installs a specified snap package from the Snap Store. You can specify a channel (e.g., <i>--channel=beta</i>) or a specific revision.<br><br><b>remove <snap_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes an installed snap package from the system. Use <i>--purge</i> to also remove all associated data.<br><br><b>list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all currently installed snap packages, showing their version, revision, tracking channel, and publisher.<br><br><b>refresh [<snap_name>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Updates an installed snap package to its latest version available on its current channel. If no snap name is provided, all snaps are refreshed.<br><br><b>find [<search_term>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches the Snap Store for available snap packages based on a search term. If no term is provided, it lists popular snaps.<br><br><b>info <snap_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about a specific snap package, including its publisher, description, version, channels, and available interfaces.<br><br><b>run <snap_name>.<app_name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a specific application binary from within an installed snap, allowing access to its confined environment.<br><br><b>connect <snap>:<plug> <snap>:<slot></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects a snap interface, granting a snap access to a specific system resource or another snap's feature (e.g., <i>snap connect myapp:camera :camera</i>).<br><br><b>disconnect <snap>:<plug> <snap>:<slot></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disconnects a snap interface, revoking a snap's access to a previously granted resource.<br><br><b>changes</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists recent system-wide changes made by the snapd daemon, such as installations, removals, or updates, with their status.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snap</b> command-line tool provides an interface for interacting with the <i>snapd</i> daemon, which manages Snap packages. Snaps are self-contained software packages that bundle an application and all its dependencies, ensuring cross-distribution compatibility and consistent operation. They are designed for easy installation, automatic updates, and strong security through confinement (sandboxing). The <b>snap</b> command allows users to install, remove, list, refresh, search for, and manage the lifecycle of Snap applications on their Linux system.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Snaps can consume significant disk space due to bundling all dependencies, potentially leading to redundant libraries across multiple snaps. They might also exhibit slower startup times compared to native packages because of their confined nature and squashfs mounting. Automatic background updates, while convenient for security, can sometimes be disruptive or undesirable for users who prefer manual control over their system's software versions. Furthermore, strong confinement can occasionally lead to integration challenges with desktop themes or native file dialogs.


title: CONFINEMENT AND INTERFACES
content:
Snaps run in a strictly isolated environment, or <i>sandbox</i>, by default, which significantly enhances system security. Their access to system resources (like the network, sound, specific file system paths, or hardware) is controlled through <i>interfaces</i> (also known as plugs and slots). These interfaces must be explicitly connected (either automatically upon installation or manually by the user) to grant a snap the necessary permissions, ensuring that applications only access what they genuinely need, thus minimizing potential security risks.


title: CHANNELS
content:
Snap packages are published to different <i>channels</i>, allowing users to choose the stability level of the software they install or track. Common channels include <b>stable</b> (for production-ready, well-tested releases), <b>candidate</b> (pre-release versions, nearly stable), <b>beta</b> (early access, potentially with bugs), and <b>edge</b> (the latest development version, often unstable). Users can specify a channel during installation (e.g., <i>snap install myapp --channel=beta</i>) or when switching an already installed snap to a different track.


title: TRANSACTIONAL UPDATES
content:
One of Snap's key features is its <i>transactional update</i> mechanism. This means that updates are atomic: an update operation either completes entirely and successfully, or if any part of it fails, the system automatically rolls back to the previous working version of the snap. This robust process helps prevent software breakage during updates, ensuring system stability and reliability, even in the event of power loss or network interruptions during the update process.


title: HISTORY
content:
Snap was developed by Canonical, the company behind Ubuntu, and first introduced in 2014 primarily for their Ubuntu Touch mobile operating system. It was later expanded to the desktop Linux environment in 2016 as a universal packaging system. The primary goal behind Snap was to provide a robust, cross-distribution application delivery mechanism that offers transactional updates, strong security through confinement, and ease of deployment for developers.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snapper</b> [<I>options</I>] <I>command</I> [<I>subcommand</I>] [<I>arguments</I>]<br><br>Examples:<br><b>snapper</b> <I>list</I><br><b>snapper</b> <I>-c root create --description "My first snapshot"</I><br><b>snapper</b> <I>rollback</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c <config>, --config <config></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the configuration to use (e.g., `root` for the root filesystem).<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress normal output messages.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Produce more verbose output.<br><br><b>--no-dbus</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not use the DBus daemon for communication. Forces direct file access (may require root).<br><br><b>--json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output data in JSON format, useful for scripting.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show program's version number and exit.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>snapper</b> is a powerful command-line tool designed for managing filesystem snapshots, primarily on <b>Btrfs</b> and <b>ZFS</b> filesystems. It provides a user-friendly interface to create, delete, and manage snapshots, enabling features like system rollbacks, easy data recovery, and version control for your filesystem.<br><br>It supports various snapshot types, including pre- and post-snapshots, often used to capture system state before and after package manager operations (e.g., `zypper` or `dnf`). <b>snapper</b> can also compare snapshots to show changes, and restore files or even the entire system to a previous state. Its integration with package managers and the ability to schedule automatic snapshots make it an invaluable tool for system administrators and users seeking robust data protection and system resilience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>snapper</b> requires a <b>Btrfs</b> or <b>ZFS</b> filesystem for full functionality. While it has experimental support for <b>EXT4</b> and <b>XFS</b> via LVM-thin, its primary design and robust features are for <b>Btrfs</b> and <b>ZFS</b>. Most operations require root privileges. Care should be taken with rollback operations as they can be destructive if not fully understood.


title: CONFIGURATIONS
content:
<b>snapper</b> operates based on configurations, typically one per filesystem root or subvolume (e.g., `root`, `home`, `srv`). These configurations are defined in files located in `/etc/snapper/configs/` and control aspects like cleanup algorithms, snapshot frequency, and disk usage limits.


title: SNAPSHOT TYPES
content:
<b>snapper</b> distinguishes between various snapshot types:<br><ul><li><I>single</I>: Manually created snapshots for specific points in time.</li><li><I>pre</I>: Snapshots taken before a significant system operation (e.g., package update).</li><li><I>post</I>: Snapshots taken after a significant system operation, linked to a corresponding `pre` snapshot. This allows seeing changes made by an operation.</li></ul>


title: CLEANUP ALGORITHMS
content:
To manage disk space, <b>snapper</b> includes automated cleanup algorithms defined per configuration. Common types include:<br><ul><li><I>timeline</I>: Keeps snapshots at specific time intervals (e.g., hourly, daily, monthly).</li><li><I>number</I>: Keeps a certain fixed number of snapshots.</li><li><I>empty-pre-post</I>: Removes `pre`/`post` pairs if no changes occurred between them.</li></ul>


title: COMMON COMMANDS
content:
Beyond the global options, <b>snapper</b> uses subcommands for its core functionality:<br><ul><li><b>list</b>: <I>Lists all existing snapshots for a given configuration.</I></li><li><b>create</b>: <I>Creates a new snapshot. This is essential for manual backups or before critical system changes.</I></li><li><b>delete</b>: <I>Removes one or more snapshots by their number.</I></li><li><b>diff</b>: <I>Shows the differences between two snapshots or between a snapshot and the current system state.</I></li><li><b>rollback</b>: <I>Rolls back the system to a specific snapshot. This is a powerful and potentially destructive operation that replaces the current filesystem state with that of the snapshot.</I></li><li><b>undochange</b>: <I>Reverts specific file changes from a snapshot.</I></li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>snapper</b> was initially developed by openSUSE and SUSE to provide robust filesystem snapshot management, particularly leveraging <b>Btrfs</b> capabilities. It was introduced to offer advanced system rollback features, tightly integrated with package management tools like YaST and `zypper` (on openSUSE/SLES). Its development aimed to simplify complex snapshot operations and make system state management more accessible and reliable for users and administrators alike.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-d, --dev <device></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the network interface to capture from, e.g., eth0 or wlan0.<br><br><b>-i, --infile <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read packets from a specified PCAP file instead of live capture.<br><br><b>-w, --outfile <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write captured raw packets to a specified PCAP file.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increase verbosity, providing more detailed output.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress the initial banner and copyright information.<br><br><b>-l, --logfile <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Log events and messages to a specified file.<br><br><b>-e, --expression <expr></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a BPF-style filter expression to narrow down traffic.<br><br><b>-x, --extended</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display packet data in both ASCII and hexadecimal formats.<br><br><b>-c, --color</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force color output, even if terminal support is not detected.<br><br><b>-r, --raw</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show raw packet data without any interpretation.<br><br><b>-u, --udp</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter and display only UDP packets.<br><br><b>-t, --tcp</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter and display only TCP packets.<br><br><b>-p, --port <port></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter traffic by a specific port number.<br><br><b>-s, --host <host></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter traffic by a specific host IP address or hostname.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a brief help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>sngrep</i> is a powerful command-line tool for displaying network traffic in an interactive curses-based interface.<br>It provides a live view of packet data, allowing users to inspect network communications in real-time or from previously captured PCAP files. Similar to <i>tcpdump</i> or <i>ngrep</i>, but with an enhanced user experience, <i>sngrep</i> allows for quick filtering, searching, and detailed inspection of packet payloads. It supports Berkeley Packet Filter (BPF) syntax for complex filtering expressions, enabling users to focus on specific protocols, ports, hosts, or traffic types.<br>Its interactive nature makes it ideal for troubleshooting network connectivity, analyzing application layer protocols like SIP, debugging VoIP issues, and performing general network monitoring. The tool offers various display modes, including ASCII, hexadecimal, and raw packet views, making it versatile for different analysis needs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Capturing live network traffic with <i>sngrep</i> typically requires root privileges or appropriate capabilities (e.g., CAP_NET_RAW).<br>The interactive ncurses interface, while powerful, may not be suitable for automated scripting tasks without external tools. Filtering expressions rely on Berkeley Packet Filter (BPF) syntax, which requires familiarity for effective use.<br>On very busy networks, <i>sngrep</i> can consume significant resources or drop packets if not properly filtered.


title: INTERACTIVE FEATURES AND KEYBINDINGS
content:
<i>sngrep</i> offers a rich interactive environment. Within the ncurses interface, users can navigate through packets, search for content, switch display modes (ASCII, HEX, RAW), follow TCP streams, and apply filters dynamically using various keybindings. Pressing <b>'h'</b> or <b>'?'</b> inside the application typically reveals a help screen with a list of available hotkeys and their functions, greatly enhancing its utility for live troubleshooting and exploration of network data.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>sngrep</i> emerged as an interactive alternative to command-line network sniffers like <i>ngrep</i>. While <i>ngrep</i> provides similar packet inspection capabilities, <i>sngrep</i> distinguishes itself with its ncurses-based graphical user interface, making real-time analysis and navigation of network flows more intuitive. Its development focuses on enhancing usability for network troubleshooting, especially for protocols like SIP (Session Initiation Protocol), which are often challenging to debug with raw packet captures. It is an open-source project continuously maintained to support modern network analysis needs.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--interface <interface> or -i <interface></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network interface to listen on (e.g., `eth0`, `wlan0`).<br><br><b>--count <num> or -c <num></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the maximum number of packets to capture before exiting.<br><br><b>--filter "<filter_expression>" or -f "<filter_expression>"</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a packet filter using a syntax similar to BPF (Berkeley Packet Filter) to capture only relevant packets.<br><br><b>--verbose or -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the output, showing more detailed packet information.<br><br><b>--output <file> or -o <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Saves captured packets to a specified file (e.g., PCAP format).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
`sniff.py` typically refers to a custom Python script designed to capture and analyze network packets passing through a specified network interface. Unlike standard system utilities, its exact functionality, options, and capabilities are entirely dependent on its internal Python code. Common features found in such scripts include the ability to listen on a specific network interface, filter packets based on various criteria (e.g., source/destination IP, port, protocol), and display captured packet details. Many `sniff.py` implementations leverage powerful Python libraries like `Scapy` for packet manipulation and parsing, or low-level raw sockets for direct interaction with network interfaces. It's often used for network diagnostics, security analysis, or educational purposes to understand network protocols.


title: CAVEATS
content:
`sniff.py` is <b>not</b> a standard, pre-installed Linux command. Its existence and functionality depend entirely on a Python script named `sniff.py` being present and executable on your system. <br><br>Running network sniffers typically requires <b>root privileges</b> (e.g., using `sudo`) to access raw sockets or specific network interfaces. <br><br>The script may require specific Python libraries (e.g., `Scapy`, `dpkt`, `pcapy`) to be installed (`pip install <library_name>`). <br><br>Error handling and robustness vary greatly depending on the script's implementation.


title: COMMON PYTHON LIBRARIES USED
content:
<ul><li><i>Scapy</i>: A powerful interactive packet manipulation program. It can forge or decode packets of a wide number of protocols, send them on the wire, capture them, match requests and replies, and much more.</li><li><i>sockets</i>: Python's built-in module for low-level network communication, often used for creating raw sockets to capture all network traffic.</li><li><i>pcapy / dpkt</i>: Libraries providing bindings to `libpcap` (for capturing packets) and functionalities for parsing common network protocols, respectively.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of network packet sniffing dates back to the early days of networking, with tools like `tcpdump` emerging in the 1980s. With the rise of scripting languages, Python became a popular choice for developing custom network tools due to its extensive library ecosystem. While there isn't a single "official" `sniff.py` history, the practice of writing Python scripts for network sniffing became prevalent with the development of libraries like Scapy (released in the early 2000s), enabling easier interaction with network protocols and raw packet data for developers and security researchers.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>sniffer.py</B> [-i <I>interface</I>] [-p] [-c <I>count</I>] [-f <I>filter_expression</I>] [-o <I>output_file</I>] [--help]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-i <I>interface</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the network interface to listen on (e.g., eth0, wlan0). If not specified, the script might attempt to find a default or prompt the user.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables promiscuous mode, allowing the script to capture all packets on the network segment, not just those destined for the host.<br><br><b>-c <I>count</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the maximum number of packets to capture before stopping.<br><br><b>-f <I>filter_expression</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a BPF (Berkeley Packet Filter) expression to filter captured packets. For example, 'tcp port 80' or 'host 192.168.1.1'.<br><br><b>-o <I>output_file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the captured raw packets to a specified file in PCAP format, which can then be opened by tools like Wireshark.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with usage information and available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>sniffer.py</I> is a hypothetical Python script designed for network packet sniffing and analysis on Linux systems. Leveraging powerful Python libraries like Scapy or dpkt, it allows users to capture raw network traffic passing through a specified interface. This tool can be invaluable for network administrators, security professionals, and developers for tasks such as troubleshooting network connectivity issues, analyzing protocol behavior, detecting suspicious network activity, or even for educational purposes in understanding network fundamentals. Unlike compiled binaries like `tcpdump`, <I>sniffer.py</I> offers the flexibility of a scripting language, enabling easy customization and integration into larger Python-based automation workflows. It typically operates by putting the network interface into <B>promiscuous mode</B> to capture all packets, regardless of their intended destination, before applying optional filters and displaying or saving the captured data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
• <B>Root Privileges:</B> Running a packet sniffer typically requires root or sudo privileges to access raw network sockets and enable promiscuous mode.<BR>• <B>Dependencies:</B> <I>sniffer.py</I> relies on specific Python libraries (e.g., Scapy, pcapy, dpkt). These must be installed (`pip install scapy`) for the script to function correctly.<BR>• <B>Performance:</B> While flexible, a Python-based sniffer might not achieve the same raw packet capture performance or efficiency as highly optimized compiled tools like `tcpdump` or `Wireshark`, especially under very high traffic loads.<BR>• <B>Ethical and Legal Implications:</B> Capturing network traffic without explicit permission can have serious ethical and legal consequences. Always ensure you have proper authorization before using such a tool on any network.<BR>• <B>System Impact:</B> Continuous packet sniffing, especially without filters, can consume significant system resources (CPU, memory, disk I/O) and potentially impact network performance.


title: DEPENDENCIES AND INSTALLATION
content:
To run <I>sniffer.py</I>, you will typically need to install specific Python libraries. The most common library for network sniffing in Python is <B>Scapy</B>. You can usually install it using pip: <BR><I>pip install scapy</I><BR>Additional dependencies like <I>libpcap-dev</I> (on Debian/Ubuntu) or <I>libdnet-dev</I> might also be required by Scapy to interact with the underlying system's packet capture mechanisms.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<I>sniffer.py</I> can be used for a variety of tasks:<BR>• <B>Network Troubleshooting:</B> Identifying why specific services are not communicating or why network latency is high.<BR>• <B>Security Monitoring:</B> Detecting unusual or malicious network traffic, such as port scans, unauthorized access attempts, or malware communication.<BR>• <B>Application Debugging:</B> Analyzing the exact protocol exchanges between clients and servers.<BR>• <B>Educational Purposes:</B> Learning how network protocols work by observing live traffic.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of network packet sniffing dates back to the early days of networking for diagnostics and analysis. While tools like `tcpdump` emerged in the late 1980s, the rise of scripting languages like Python in the 2000s opened new avenues for developing flexible and customizable network tools. Libraries such as Scapy, first released in 2004, revolutionized network programming in Python by providing a powerful framework for crafting, sending, sniffing, and dissecting network packets. <I>sniffer.py</I> represents a common use case for these libraries, illustrating how Python can be effectively used to build powerful network analysis utilities without the complexity of low-level C programming, making network tool development more accessible. Its usage reflects a broader trend of leveraging high-level languages for rapid prototyping and specialized network security and monitoring tasks.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snmpbulkget</b> [<i>COMMON OPTIONS</i>] <i>AGENT</i> [<i>OID</i>]...<br><br><b>snmpbulkget</b> [<i>SNMPv3 OPTIONS</i>] <i>AGENT</i> [<i>OID</i>]...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v <1|2c|3></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use.<br><br><b>-c <COMMUNITY></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests.<br><br><b>-r <RETRIES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the number of retries before timing out (default is 5).<br><br><b>-t <TIMEOUT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds for the initial request (default is 1).<br><br><b>-l <LEVEL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security level for SNMPv3: <b>noAuthNoPriv</b>, <b>authNoPriv</b>, or <b>authPriv</b>.<br><br><b>-u <USER></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the security name (username) for SNMPv3 authentication.<br><br><b>-a <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the authentication protocol for SNMPv3 (e.g., MD5, SHA).<br><br><b>-A <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the authentication passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b>-x <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the privacy protocol for SNMPv3 (e.g., DES, AES).<br><br><b>-X <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the privacy passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b>-Cn <NON_REPEATERS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of OIDs at the beginning of the OID list for which only a single GETNEXT operation is performed. (default is 0)<br><br><b>-Cr <MAX_REPETITIONS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the maximum number of GETNEXT operations performed for the remaining 'repeater' OIDs. (default is 10)<br><br><b>-M <MIBS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds one or more directories to the MIB search path.<br><br><b>-O <OPTIONS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Controls the output format (e.g., <b>q</b> for quiet, <b>f</b> for full OID).<br><br><b><i>AGENT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The hostname or IP address of the target SNMP agent.<br><br><b><i>OID</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more Object Identifiers (OIDs) to query. These can be numeric or MIB-defined names.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>snmpbulkget</b></i> is a command-line utility from the Net-SNMP suite used to query network devices via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). It specifically implements the SNMP GETBULK request, which is available in SNMPv2c and SNMPv3. Unlike <i><b>snmpget</b></i> (which retrieves a single OID) or <i><b>snmpwalk</b></i> (which performs a series of GETNEXT requests), <i><b>snmpbulkget</b></i> fetches multiple OIDs in a single request, significantly reducing network overhead and improving performance when querying large tables or sequential MIB objects. It's particularly useful for fetching an entire MIB subtree or large data sets from a device with fewer round trips. The command requires specifying the number of "non-repeaters" and "max repetitions" to control the bulk retrieval process.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><i><b>snmpbulkget</b></i> is only supported by SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 agents. It will not work with SNMPv1 agents.</li><li>Understanding <i>non-repeaters</i> and <i>max-repetitions</i> is crucial for effective use; incorrect values can lead to unexpected or incomplete results.</li><li>Large <i>max-repetitions</i> values can put a significant load on the SNMP agent and network, potentially leading to timeouts or dropped packets if the agent is overwhelmed.</li><li>MIB files must be properly configured and accessible for symbolic OID names to resolve correctly; otherwise, only numeric OIDs can be used.</li></ul>


title: EFFICIENCY
content:
<i><b>snmpbulkget</b></i> is significantly more efficient than <i><b>snmpwalk</b></i> for retrieving large tables or sequential data because it minimizes the number of round trips between the manager and the agent. This is achieved by sending a single request that asks for multiple OIDs and multiple instances of those OIDs, getting a large block of data back in one response.


title: USAGE WITH TABLES
content:
When querying SNMP tables, the <i>-Cn</i> (non-repeaters) parameter is often set to 0, and <i>-Cr</i> (max-repetitions) is set to a value large enough to retrieve all desired rows, making it ideal for gathering entire table data efficiently.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i><b>snmpbulkget</b></i> command is part of the Net-SNMP suite, a widely used collection of applications and libraries for implementing SNMP. The GETBULK operation itself was introduced with SNMPv2 to address the inefficiency of retrieving large amounts of data using multiple GETNEXT requests (as <i><b>snmpwalk</b></i> does for SNMPv1). <i><b>snmpbulkget</b></i> was developed to provide a command-line interface to this more efficient operation, allowing network administrators to quickly and effectively query large datasets like routing tables or interface statistics from SNMP-enabled devices. Its evolution parallels the development and adoption of SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snmpdf</b> [<i>Net-SNMP Common Options</i>] [<b>-ahHU</b>] [<b>-p</b> <i>path</i>] [<b>-P</b> <i>prefix</i>] [<b>-x</b> <i>dev|type</i>] [<b>-X</b> <i>dev|type</i>] [<b>-f</b> <i>format</i>] [<b>-F</b>] <i>AGENT</i><br><br><i>Net-SNMP Common Options</i> often include:<br><b>-v</b> <i>1|2c|3</i> (SNMP version)<br><b>-c</b> <i>COMMUNITY</i> (SNMPv1/2c community string)<br><b>-t</b> <i>TIMEOUT</i> (Timeout in seconds)<br><b>-r</b> <i>RETRIES</i> (Number of retries)<br>...and various SNMPv3 authentication/privacy options.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>AGENT</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The hostname or IP address of the remote device running the SNMP agent to query.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-H</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the header line regardless of output format (e.g., when outputting in CSV or XML formats where a header might be suppressed).<br><br><b><b>-U</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Does not display usage for mounted disks; instead, it focuses on the underlying physical partitions or logical volumes directly reported by the SNMP agent.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only show partitions that are mounted at the specified absolute <i>path</i>.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>prefix</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only show partitions whose mount point starts with the specified <i>prefix</i>.<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i>dev|type</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Excludes devices or filesystem types matching the provided pattern. Multiple patterns can be separated by commas (e.g., <i>-x /dev/sda1,ext4</i>).<br><br><b><b>-X</b> <i>dev|type</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes only devices or filesystem types matching the provided pattern. Multiple patterns can be separated by commas (e.g., <i>-X /dev/sdb*,xfs</i>). This is the inverse of <b>-x</b>.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>format</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output format. Common options include: <i>table</i> (default), <i>csv</i>, <i>xml</i>, <i>javascript</i>. Using <i>table</i> provides human-readable output, while others are for programmatic parsing.<br><br><b><b>-F</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the display of all partitions, even those that might appear to be non-existent or inaccessible. This can be useful for debugging or when an agent reports unusual or transient states.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> <i>1|2c|3</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use for the query (SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, or SNMPv3). SNMPv2c is commonly used due to its improved capabilities over v1, while v3 offers security features.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>COMMUNITY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string (password) for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests. This string is used by the SNMP agent to authenticate incoming requests.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>TIMEOUT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds for the SNMP request. If the agent does not respond within this time, the request is considered failed.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>RETRIES</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of retries for the SNMP request. If the initial request times out, <i>snmpdf</i> will retry the specified number of times before giving up.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snmpdf</i> is a utility from the Net-SNMP suite that allows users to query disk space usage on remote hosts using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). It functions much like the local <i>df</i> command, but instead of reading local filesystem information, it communicates with an SNMP agent running on a target device. This makes <i>snmpdf</i> invaluable for network administrators and monitoring systems to gain insight into disk utilization across a large number of servers or network devices without needing direct shell access. It provides details such as total size, used space, available space, and percentage used for each mounted filesystem, making it a critical tool for proactive resource management and identifying potential storage bottlenecks remotely.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>snmpdf</i> relies heavily on the remote host's SNMP agent being properly configured and running, with the necessary MIBs (especially the HOST-RESOURCES-MIB) enabled to expose disk usage information. Firewall rules between the querying machine and the target host must allow SNMP traffic (typically UDP port 161). Incorrect SNMP community strings (for v1/v2c) or authentication/privacy parameters (for v3) will result in "No Such Instance currently exists" or timeout errors. Querying a large number of hosts or frequently querying can impose a slight load on both the querying machine and the target agents. For security, SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c transmit community strings in plain text, making SNMPv3 the preferred choice for sensitive environments due to its authentication and encryption capabilities.


title: OUTPUT COLUMNS
content:
By default, <i>snmpdf</i> outputs information in a tabular format with the following columns:<br><b>Filesystem</b>: The mount point or device name.<br><b>Size</b>: Total capacity of the filesystem.<br><b>Used</b>: Amount of space currently in use.<br><b>Avail</b>: Amount of space available for use.<br><b>%Used</b>: Percentage of the total space that is used.<br><b>Mounted on</b>: The directory where the filesystem is mounted.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>snmpdf</i> is an integral part of the Net-SNMP suite, an open-source collection of applications and libraries used for implementing SNMP. Its development stemmed from the need for remote system monitoring capabilities, specifically to replicate the functionality of the local <i>df</i> command over a network using the SNMP protocol. It is typically implemented as a Perl script that leverages the Net-SNMP Perl modules to interact with SNMP agents, making it a flexible and powerful tool for network management since its early days within the Net-SNMP project.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snmpget</b> [<i>COMMON OPTIONS</i>] [<i>AUTHENTICATION OPTIONS</i>] <i>AGENT</i> <i>OID</i> [<i>OID</i>...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>AGENT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The hostname, IP address, or domain name of the target SNMP agent (network device or server) to query.<br><br><b><i>OID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The Object Identifier (OID) of the specific management information to retrieve. OIDs can be numerical (e.g., '.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0') or textual (e.g., 'sysName.0') if MIBs are loaded.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> <i><1|2c|3></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use for the request. <br><i>1</i> for SNMPv1, <i>2c</i> for SNMPv2c, and <i>3</i> for SNMPv3.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>COMMUNITY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, specifies the community string (a plaintext password) required to access the SNMP agent.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>USER</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv3, specifies the security name (username) for authentication.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>LEVEL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv3, specifies the security level: <br><i>noAuthNoPriv</i> (no authentication, no encryption)<br><i>authNoPriv</i> (authentication, no encryption)<br><i>authPriv</i> (authentication and encryption).<br><br><b><b>-a</b> <i>PROTOCOL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv3, specifies the authentication protocol: <i>MD5</i> or <i>SHA</i>.<br><br><b><b>-A</b> <i>PASSPHRASE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv3, specifies the authentication passphrase for the user.<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i>PROTOCOL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv3, specifies the privacy (encryption) protocol: <i>DES</i> or <i>AES</i>.<br><br><b><b>-X</b> <i>PASSPHRASE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For SNMPv3, specifies the privacy (encryption) passphrase for the user.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>TIMEOUT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds before retransmitting a request. Default is 1 second.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>RETRIES</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of retries before giving up. Default is 5 retries.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>PORT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the UDP port number of the SNMP agent. Default is 161.<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>PATHLIST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a colon-separated list of directories to search for MIB files.<br><br><b><b>-m</b> <i>MIBLIST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a colon-separated list of MIB modules to load. Use 'ALL' to load all MIBs in the search path.<br><br><b><b>-Oq</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output option: Suppress MIB parsing, print only the OID and value.<br><br><b><b>-Of</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output option: Print the full OID, including the enterprise name (if available).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snmpget</b> command is a powerful utility within the Net-SNMP suite, used to retrieve a single specific piece of management information from a network device or server that supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). It achieves this by sending an SNMP GET request to the target SNMP agent. The command requires the address of the SNMP agent and the Object Identifier (OID) of the specific data point to be retrieved. <br><br>It supports various SNMP versions, including SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3, with increasing levels of security and functionality. For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c, a 'community string' is typically required for authentication, acting like a password. SNMPv3 offers robust security features like authentication (MD5, SHA) and encryption (DES, AES), making it suitable for secure environments. <b>snmpget</b> is fundamental for network monitoring, troubleshooting, and automation scripts that need to fetch specific status or configuration parameters from network infrastructure.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>snmpget</b> requires that the target network device has an SNMP agent running and properly configured to allow queries from the source IP. <br><br>Firewalls must permit UDP traffic (typically port 161) between the querying machine and the SNMP agent. <br><br>For SNMPv1/v2c, the 'community string' is often transmitted in plaintext, posing a security risk if intercepted. Always use SNMPv3 when possible for enhanced security through authentication and encryption.


title: SNMP VERSIONS AND SECURITY
content:
<b>SNMPv1</b> and <b>SNMPv2c</b> use 'community strings' for basic authentication, which are sent in plaintext and offer no encryption. This makes them vulnerable to eavesdropping and unauthorized access. <br><br><b>SNMPv3</b> provides robust security features including authentication (MD5, SHA) and encryption (DES, AES), ensuring data integrity, origin authentication, and confidentiality. It is highly recommended for sensitive environments.


title: OBJECT IDENTIFIERS (OIDS) AND MIBS
content:
An <b>OID</b> (Object Identifier) is a hierarchical identifier used to uniquely name objects in a Management Information Base (MIB). <b>MIBs</b> are essentially databases that describe the structure of management data and define objects (variables) that can be queried or manipulated on an SNMP agent. <br><br>While <b>snmpget</b> can query using numerical OIDs, loading relevant MIB files (using <b>-M</b> and <b>-m</b> options) allows you to use more human-readable textual OIDs, simplifying the process of identifying and retrieving specific information.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>snmpget</b> is a core component of the Net-SNMP project, an open-source suite of applications and libraries for implementing SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). Developed by the Net-SNMP community, it has been a staple tool for network administrators and developers since its early days, evolving alongside SNMP protocol versions (v1, v2c, v3). Its widespread adoption is due to its reliability, comprehensive feature set, and cross-platform availability, making it an indispensable utility for interacting with SNMP-enabled devices.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snmpgetnext</b> [<i>APPLICATION OPTIONS</i>] [<i>COMMON OPTIONS</i>] <i>AGENT OID</i> [<i>OID...</i>]<br><br><i>APPLICATION OPTIONS</i>: Options specific to <b>snmpgetnext</b> (though most are common across Net-SNMP tools).<br><i>COMMON OPTIONS</i>: Standard Net-SNMP command-line options for authentication, transport, and output.<br><i>AGENT</i>: The hostname or IP address of the SNMP agent to query, optionally followed by a colon and port number (e.g., <i>localhost:161</i>).<br><i>OID</i>: One or more Object Identifiers (e.g., <i>iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib-2.system.sysDescr.0</i> or its numerical equivalent <i>1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0</i>). For each OID provided, <b>snmpgetnext</b> will return the <i>next</i> OID and its value.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v <VERSION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use. Common values are <i>1</i>, <i>2c</i>, or <i>3</i>.<br><br><b>-c <COMMUNITY></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests (e.g., 'public', 'private').<br><br><b>-r <RETRIES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the number of retries before the request times out. Default is <i>5</i>.<br><br><b>-t <TIMEOUT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds before retrying the request. Default is <i>1</i>.<br><br><b>-O <OPTIONS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies various output formatting options. Examples include <i>q</i> (quiet), <i>f</i> (full OID names), <i>n</i> (numeric OIDs), <i>s</i> (short OID names), <i>x</i> (hex dump), <i>e</i> (enumerate values).<br><br><b>-m <MIB-LIST></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a colon-separated list of MIB modules to load. Using <i>ALL</i> loads all known MIBs.<br><br><b>-M <MIB-DIRS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a colon-separated list of directories to search for MIB files. Default is usually <i>/usr/share/snmp/mibs</i>.<br><br><b>-Pu</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the use of UDP over IPv6 for communication. Default is UDP over IPv4.<br><br><b>-Pe</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the use of TCP over IPv6 for communication.<br><br><b>-p <PORT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the destination UDP port for SNMP requests. Default is <i>161</i>.<br><br><b>-l <LEVEL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security level for SNMPv3 requests. Options include <i>noAuthNoPriv</i>, <i>authNoPriv</i>, <i>authPriv</i>.<br><br><b>-u <USER></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the security name (username) for SNMPv3 authentication.<br><br><b>-a <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the authentication protocol for SNMPv3. Common values are <i>MD5</i> or <i>SHA</i>.<br><br><b>-A <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the authentication passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b>-x <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the privacy (encryption) protocol for SNMPv3. Common values are <i>DES</i> or <i>AES</i>.<br><br><b>-X <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the privacy passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b>-n <CONTEXT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the context name for SNMPv3 requests.<br><br><b>-E <ENGINE-ID></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the context engine ID for SNMPv3 requests.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snmpgetnext</b> command is a powerful utility from the Net-SNMP suite designed to fetch the <i>lexicographically next</i> MIB object from an SNMP-enabled network device (agent). Unlike <b>snmpget</b>, which retrieves the value of a precisely specified Object Identifier (OID), <b>snmpgetnext</b> queries the agent for the OID that immediately follows the one provided in the request. This functionality is crucial for traversing and discovering the structure of an agent's Management Information Base (MIB). It is commonly used as a building block for tools like <b>snmpwalk</b>, which automate the process of retrieving all variables within a specific MIB subtree. It supports various SNMP versions, including SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and the more secure SNMPv3, allowing for flexible and secure network monitoring and management operations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>snmpgetnext</b> requires that an SNMP agent is running and properly configured on the target device, and that network connectivity (including firewall rules) allows SNMP traffic (default UDP port 161). For symbolic OID resolution, ensure the necessary MIB files are installed and accessible to the <b>snmpgetnext</b> command. SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c use clear-text community strings, which pose a security risk on untrusted networks. SNMPv3 offers robust security features including authentication and encryption, which should be preferred for sensitive operations.


title: MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE (MIB)
content:
A MIB is a hierarchical database that defines the objects managed by an SNMP agent on a network device. OIDs (Object Identifiers) are used to uniquely identify these objects within the MIB tree. <b>snmpgetnext</b> relies on the MIB structure to determine the 'next' object.


title: OBJECT IDENTIFIERS (OIDS)
content:
OIDs are globally unique identifiers used in SNMP to name objects in a MIB. They are represented as a sequence of numbers separated by dots (e.g., <i>1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0</i>). <b>snmpgetnext</b> operates by finding the OID that immediately follows the provided OID in the MIB's lexicographical order.


title: SNMP VERSIONS
content:
<b>SNMPv1</b>: The original version, simple but lacks security.<br><b>SNMPv2c</b>: Adds support for 64-bit counters and improved error handling, still uses community strings for authentication.<br><b>SNMPv3</b>: Introduces strong authentication (MD5, SHA) and encryption (DES, AES) for secure communication, along with user-based security models.


title: HISTORY
content:
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) itself emerged in the late 1980s as a standard for managing devices on IP networks. The <b>snmpgetnext</b> command is part of the Net-SNMP project, an open-source suite of SNMP tools and libraries. Net-SNMP was originally known as UCD-SNMP, developed at the University of California, Davis. Over the years, the project has evolved to support successive versions of the SNMP protocol (v1, v2c, and v3), incorporating new features and security enhancements, making <b>snmpgetnext</b> and related tools indispensable for network monitoring and management.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display all sockets (listening and non-listening connections).<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a table of all network interfaces and their statistics.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the kernel IP routing tables.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display per-protocol statistics for protocols such as TCP, UDP, ICMP, and IP.<br><br><b>-p <protocol></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display connections or statistics for the specified <i>protocol</i> (e.g., tcp, udp, ip, icmp).<br><br><b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display numeric addresses and port numbers instead of attempting to determine symbolic host names or service names.<br><br><b>-Cn</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A compatibility option, similar to <i>-n</i>, primarily used to ensure numeric output and suppress DNS lookups.<br><br><b>-v <version></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the SNMP <i>version</i> to use for the query (e.g., 1, 2c, 3).<br><br><b>-c <community></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the SNMP <i>community string</i> for authentication with SNMPv1/v2c agents.<br><br><b>-H <hostname></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the <i>hostname</i> or IP address of the target SNMP agent. If omitted, it defaults to 'localhost'.<br><br><b>-L <loglevel></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the logging <i>level</i> (e.g., n for nothing, v for verbose, d for debug, w for warning, e for error, c for critical, q for quiet).<br><br><b>-t <timeout></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the request <i>timeout</i> in seconds before retransmitting the request or giving up.<br><br><b>-r <retries></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the number of <i>retries</i> for the SNMP request before declaring a failure.<br><br><b>-M <mibdir></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a colon-separated list of <i>MIB directories</i> to search for MIB definition files.<br><br><b>-m <miblist></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a colon-separated list of <i>MIB modules</i> to load, overriding the default list.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snmpnetstat</b> command is a utility from the Net-SNMP suite that provides network statistics similar to the standard <i>netstat</i> command, but retrieves this information by querying a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent. This allows for monitoring network activity and configurations on remote systems that expose SNMP data. It can display active connections, routing tables, interface statistics, and per-protocol statistics, making it a powerful tool for network diagnostics and monitoring in an SNMP-enabled environment.<br><br>Unlike <i>netstat</i> which operates locally, <b>snmpnetstat</b> relies on the availability and proper configuration of an SNMP agent on the target machine (local or remote) to fetch network data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>snmpnetstat</b> inherently requires an SNMP agent (e.g., `snmpd`) to be running and properly configured on the target system for data retrieval. Without an active and accessible agent, the command cannot function.<br><br>Network connectivity between the machine running <b>snmpnetstat</b> and the target SNMP agent is crucial, as are correct SNMP community strings or user credentials (for SNMPv3) for successful authentication.<br><br>Be mindful of security implications: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c transmit community strings in plain text over the network, making them vulnerable to eavesdropping. SNMPv3 offers improved security features like authentication and encryption.


title: AGENT CONFIGURATION FOR DATA AVAILABILITY
content:
The specific network statistics available through <b>snmpnetstat</b> are dependent on what the SNMP agent on the target system is configured to expose. For instance, if the agent's configuration (e.g., `snmpd.conf`) restricts access to certain MIBs or does not enable specific information gathering, <b>snmpnetstat</b> will not be able to retrieve that data, even if it's technically supported by the command's options.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>snmpnetstat</b> is a component of the Net-SNMP project, a comprehensive suite of tools and libraries for implementing the Simple Network Management Protocol. The Net-SNMP project, originally known as `ucd-snmp` (from the University of California, Davis), began its development in the early 1990s. <b>snmpnetstat</b> was created to extend the functionality of the traditional `netstat` command, enabling network administrators to gather vital network statistics remotely via SNMP, aligning with the project's goal of providing robust SNMP-based network management capabilities.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snmpset</b> [<I>COMMON OPTIONS</I>] <I>AGENT</I> [<I>OID</I> <I>TYPE</I> <I>VALUE</I>]...<br><br><I>COMMON OPTIONS</I> refers to the standard command-line options available across Net-SNMP utilities for specifying SNMP version, security credentials, transport details, and MIB handling.<br><I>AGENT</I> is the hostname or IP address of the SNMP agent, optionally followed by a port number (e.g., <i>udp:localhost:161</i>).<br><I>OID</I> is the Object Identifier of the variable to set (e.g., <i>sysName.0</i> or <i>.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0</i>).<br><I>TYPE</I> specifies the data type of the value being set. This is crucial and must match the MIB definition for the OID. See "Data Types" below for common types.<br><I>VALUE</I> is the new value to which the specified OID will be set.<br>Multiple <I>OID TYPE VALUE</I> triplets can be provided in a single command to perform multiple modifications within one SNMP SET PDU.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v <1|2c|3></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use.<br><br><b>-c <COMMUNITY></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests.<br><br><b>-u <USER></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security name (user name) for SNMPv3 requests.<br><br><b>-l <LEVEL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security level for SNMPv3 requests (noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, authPriv).<br><br><b>-a <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the authentication protocol for SNMPv3 (MD5, SHA).<br><br><b>-A <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the authentication passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b>-x <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the privacy protocol for SNMPv3 (DES, AES, AES192, AES256).<br><br><b>-X <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the privacy passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b>-n <CONTEXT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the context name for SNMPv3 requests.<br><br><b>-t <TIMEOUT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the timeout in seconds before retransmitting a request.<br><br><b>-r <RETRIES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of retries before giving up.<br><br><b>-M <MIBS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a colon-separated list of directories to search for MIB files.<br><br><b>-m <MIBS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a colon-separated list of MIB modules to load. Use ALL to load all MIBs.<br><br><b>-O <OPTIONS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies various output formatting options (e.g., -Ov for value only).<br><br><b>-P <PROTOCOLS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the transport protocols to use (e.g., UDP, TCP).<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps debugging information about the packet exchanges.<br><br><b>OID</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The Object Identifier (MIB variable) to set. Can be numeric or textual.<br><br><b>TYPE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The data type of the value being set. (e.g., 'i', 's', 'x', 'o', 't', 'a').<br><br><b>VALUE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The new value to assign to the specified OID.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snmpset</b> command is a powerful utility from the Net-SNMP suite used to send an SNMP SET request to an SNMP agent. Its primary function is to modify the value of one or more variables (Object Identifiers or OIDs) on a remote SNMP-enabled device. This allows administrators to configure network devices, change system parameters, or control specific functionalities remotely, provided the SNMP agent is configured to permit write operations. Unlike <i>snmpget</i> which retrieves data, <b>snmpset</b> actively changes it. It supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3, offering various security and authentication options for secure operations. The command requires the target agent's address, appropriate credentials (community string for v1/v2c or user/authentication/privacy details for v3), and the specific OID, data type, and new value for each variable to be set.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Setting SNMP variables requires that the SNMP agent on the target device is configured to allow write operations from the source. Misconfigured SET requests (e.g., incorrect OID, wrong data type, or invalid value) can lead to errors or unexpected behavior on the target device. Always verify the OID's write capability and expected data type from the MIB definition. SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c send community strings in plain text, which is insecure for sensitive operations. SNMPv3 should be used for operations requiring authentication and privacy.


title: DATA TYPES
content:
The <I>TYPE</I> argument is crucial for <b>snmpset</b> to correctly interpret the <I>VALUE</I>. Common types include:<br><b>i</b>: <I>INTEGER</I> or <I>Counter</I> (e.g., <i>123</i>)<br><b>u</b>: <I>UNSIGNED INTEGER</I> or <I>Gauge</I> (e.g., <i>456U</i>)<br><b>s</b>: <I>STRING</I> (e.g., <i>"hello world"</i>)<br><b>x</b>: <I>HEX STRING</I> (e.g., <i>"0F:A4:B3"</i> or <i>"0xA4B3"</i>)<br><b>d</b>: <I>DECIMAL STRING</I> (e.g., <i>"10.20.30.40"</i>)<br><b>n</b>: <I>NULL</I> (e.g., <i>""</i> for empty)<br><b>o</b>: <I>OBJID</I> (e.g., <i>.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0</i>)<br><b>t</b>: <I>TIMETICKS</I> (e.g., <i>360000</i> for 1 hour)<br><b>a</b>: <I>IPADDRESS</I> (e.g., <i>192.168.1.1</i>)<br><b>b</b>: <I>BITS</I> (e.g., <i>"00101100"</i> or <i>"0:1,1:0,2:1"</i>)<br><b>U</b>: <I>Unaligned string</I> for historical purposes, similar to 's'.<br>Refer to the MIB definition for the exact type expected for each OID.


title: EXAMPLES
content:
<b>1. Set system name (SNMPv2c):</b><br><i>snmpset -v 2c -c private localhost sysName.0 s "MyRouter"</i><br><br><b>2. Set system contact (SNMPv3 with authentication and privacy):</b><br><i>snmpset -v 3 -u myuser -l authPriv -a SHA -A authpass123 -x AES -X privpass456 localhost sysContact.0 s "IT Department &lt;it@example.com&gt;"</i><br><br><b>3. Set an integer value (e.g., for a custom counter):</b><br><i>snmpset -v 2c -c private localhost .1.3.6.1.4.1.9999.1.1.0 i 12345</i><br><br><b>4. Set multiple values in one request:</b><br><i>snmpset -v 2c -c private localhost sysName.0 s "NewDevice" sysLocation.0 s "Server Room 1"</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>snmpset</b> is an integral part of the Net-SNMP project, an open-source suite of SNMP applications and libraries. Initially known as UCD-SNMP, the project has been under continuous development since the mid-1990s. The command has evolved to support all major SNMP versions (v1, v2c, and v3) as they were standardized, incorporating the necessary security and authentication mechanisms. It has become a standard tool for network administrators and developers for automating network device configuration and management tasks.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
snmpstatus [COMMON OPTIONS] AGENT<br><br><i>COMMON OPTIONS</i>: Standard Net-SNMP options for specifying SNMP version, authentication, and privacy settings.<br><i>AGENT</i>: The target SNMP agent's hostname or IP address, optionally followed by a colon and port number (e.g., <i>192.168.1.1:161</i>).


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v <1|2c|3></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use. <br><i>1</i> for SNMPv1, <i>2c</i> for SNMPv2c, and <i>3</i> for SNMPv3.<br><br><b><b>-c <COMMUNITY></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests. <br>Typically 'public' or 'private'.<br><br><b><b>-u <USER></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the security name (username) for SNMPv3 authentication.<br><br><b><b>-l <LEVEL></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security level for SNMPv3.<br>Options are <i>noAuthNoPriv</i>, <i>authNoPriv</i>, or <i>authPriv</i>.<br><br><b><b>-A <PASSPHRASE></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the authentication passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b><b>-X <PASSPHRASE></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the privacy (encryption) passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b><b>-a <PROTOCOL></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the authentication protocol for SNMPv3. <br>Commonly <i>MD5</i> or <i>SHA</i>.<br><br><b><b>-x <PROTOCOL></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the privacy protocol for SNMPv3. <br>Commonly <i>DES</i> or <i>AES</i>.<br><br><b><b>-t <TIMEOUT></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds for each SNMP request.<br><br><b><b>-r <RETRIES></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of retries before giving up on an SNMP request.<br><br><b><b>AGENT</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The hostname or IP address of the target SNMP agent. <br>Can include a port (e.g., <i>localhost:161</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snmpstatus</i> is a command-line utility from the <I>Net-SNMP</I> suite, designed to quickly retrieve and display a summary of operational statistics from an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent. It connects to a specified network device or server running an SNMP agent and queries standard MIB-II objects to provide information such as system uptime, network interface status, and input/output octets. Unlike more granular tools like <i>snmpget</i> or <i>snmpwalk</i>, <i>snmpstatus</i> aims to present a consolidated, human-readable overview of the agent's health and activity, making it an ideal tool for quick diagnostics and initial network monitoring checks. It simplifies the process of getting essential SNMP data without requiring specific OID knowledge.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires a running SNMP agent on the target system to function.<br>Network firewalls must allow UDP port 161 (or custom port) for SNMP communication.<br>Correct community strings (SNMPv1/v2c) or authentication/privacy credentials (SNMPv3) are essential.<br>Provides a high-level summary; for detailed MIB object querying, use <i>snmpget</i> or <i>snmpwalk</i>.<br>Output relies on standard MIB-II implementation; custom OIDs are not typically displayed by <i>snmpstatus</i>.


title: OUTPUT INTERPRETATION
content:
The output of <I>snmpstatus</I> typically includes: <br> - <B>System Uptime</B>: How long the system has been running. <br> - <B>Network Interfaces</B>: Summary of active interfaces, often showing total input/output octets and packet counts. <br> - <B>IP Addressing</B>: Basic IP address configuration. <br> - <B>SNMP Counters</B>: Statistics on SNMP messages received and sent, including errors or authentication failures. <br>This consolidated view quickly highlights the operational state and traffic levels of the monitored device.


title: COMMON ERRORS
content:
- <B>Timeout</B>: Indicates the agent did not respond within the specified time, often due to network issues, firewall blocks, or the agent not running. <br> - <B>No Such Name</B> or <B>Authorization Failed</B>: Suggests incorrect community string or SNMPv3 credentials. <br> - <B>No Agent Response</B>: Similar to timeout, implies the target is unreachable or not running an SNMP service. <br>Troubleshooting usually involves verifying network connectivity, SNMP agent status, and credentials.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>snmpstatus</i> is an integral part of the <I>Net-SNMP</I> software suite, which originated from the <I>UCD-SNMP</I> project at the University of California, Davis. It has been a standard utility within the suite since its early days, evolving alongside the SNMP protocol itself (from SNMPv1 through SNMPv3). Its development has focused on providing a user-friendly, consolidated view of an SNMP agent's status, making it a persistent and valuable tool for network administrators and developers over decades.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v <VERSION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>SNMP protocol version</i> (1, 2c, or 3).<br><br><b>-c <COMMUNITY></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>community string</i> for SNMP v1/v2c requests.<br><br><b>-u <SECURITYNAME></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>security name</i> (user name) for SNMP v3 authentication.<br><br><b>-l <LEVEL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>security level</i> for SNMP v3 (noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, authPriv).<br><br><b>-a <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the <i>authentication protocol</i> for SNMP v3 (MD5 or SHA).<br><br><b>-A <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the <i>authentication passphrase</i> for SNMP v3.<br><br><b>-x <PROTOCOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the <i>privacy protocol</i> for SNMP v3 (DES, AES).<br><br><b>-X <PASSPHRASE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the <i>privacy passphrase</i> for SNMP v3.<br><br><b>-p <PORT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>UDP port</i> of the SNMP agent.<br><br><b>-t <TIMEOUT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>timeout duration</i> in seconds before retrying the request.<br><br><b>-r <RETRIES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>number of retries</i> for the request.<br><br><b>-m <MIBLIST></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads specific <i>MIB modules</i>, overriding the default list.<br><br><b>-M <MIBDIRS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies <i>directories</i> to search for MIB files.<br><br><b>-Cb</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the printing of <i>table borders</i>.<br><br><b>-CH</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses the printing of <i>column headers</i>.<br><br><b>-CI</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses the printing of <i>table indexes</i> (the first column).<br><br><b>-CA</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <i>all columns</i>, including those with no data or zero values for all rows.<br><br><b>-Cc</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints <i>column comments</i>, which are descriptions from the MIB.<br><br><b>-Cf</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <i>full, untruncated values</i> in columns.<br><br><b>-CS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sorts the table output <i>by index</i> (often the default behavior).<br><br><b>-CW <WIDTH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the <i>maximum column width</i>, truncating longer values.<br><br><b>-CU</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the table <i>unsorted</i>, in the order received from the agent.<br><br><b>-On</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <i>OIDs numerically</i>.<br><br><b>-Os</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <i>OIDs symbolically</i> (default for most outputs).<br><br><b>-Ov</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <i>OIDs only as values</i>, suppressing other information.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snmptable</i> is a command-line utility from the Net-SNMP project designed to query an SNMP agent for tabular MIB information and present it in a user-friendly, formatted manner. Unlike <i>snmpwalk</i>, which lists all variables in a subtree, <i>snmptable</i> specifically understands the structure of SNMP tables—conceptual rows of related variables identified by common OID prefixes and indices.<br><br>It is particularly useful for fetching structured data such as network interface statistics (e.g., <i>ifTable</i>), routing entries, or connection tables. The command automatically determines column headers from MIB definitions and displays the data in a clear, row-and-column format, similar to a spreadsheet. This intelligent formatting makes it significantly easier to read and interpret complex network device data compared to manually parsing raw SNMP output. <i>snmptable</i> leverages standard SNMP operations like GETNEXT and GETBULK to efficiently retrieve entire table contents, making it an indispensable tool for network monitoring, auditing, and troubleshooting.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>Requires appropriate MIB files to be loaded and accessible for symbolic OID names and correct column header display.</li><li>Performance can be impacted for extremely large tables due to the iterative nature of SNMP GETNEXT/GETBULK requests.</li><li>May exhibit unexpected behavior if the SNMP agent does not strictly adhere to SMI standards for table structure or returns incomplete data for a table.</li><li>Column formatting can be tricky; use <i>-CW</i> to manage column widths and avoid truncation, or <i>-Cf</i> for full values.</li></ul>


title: UNDERSTANDING SNMP TABLES
content:
SNMP tables are conceptual collections of related variables, organized into rows and columns. Each row represents a specific instance of an entity (e.g., a network interface), uniquely identified by an index or a combination of indices. Columns correspond to individual SNMP objects (e.g., <i>ifDescr</i>, <i>ifInOctets</i>). <i>snmptable</i> intelligently queries these objects by their common index, groups them, and presents them as formatted rows, making complex MIB data easily digestible.


title: MIBS AND OUTPUT CUSTOMIZATION
content:
For <i>snmptable</i> to provide meaningful output (e.g., symbolic column headers instead of numerical OIDs), it relies heavily on <i>MIB (Management Information Base)</i> files. These files define the structure, naming, and relationships of SNMP objects. If necessary MIBs are not loaded or found in specified directories (using <i>-m</i> and <i>-M</i>), the output may default to less readable numerical OIDs. Furthermore, <i>snmptable</i> offers extensive output customization options (like <i>-Cb</i>, <i>-CH</i>, <i>-CI</i>, <i>-CA</i>, <i>-Cf</i>, <i>-CS</i>, <i>-CW</i>, <i>-CU</i>) to tailor the presentation of the table to specific needs.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>snmptable</i> is an integral part of the Net-SNMP suite (formerly UCD-SNMP), which has been under active development since the mid-1990s. It was developed to address the specific need for displaying structured MIB data in a readable format, building upon the foundational capabilities of `snmpwalk`. Its evolution has focused on robust MIB compliance, efficient data retrieval, and user-friendly output options, making it a staple for network administrators and developers working with SNMP.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
Since 'snmptest' is generally a conceptual term or a custom script, a precise, universal synopsis does not exist. However, any script or process designed for SNMP testing would typically leverage the common options and arguments of standard Net-SNMP commands, which often follow this pattern:<br><br><B>snmptest</B> [<i>COMMON OPTIONS</i>] [<i>AGENT</i>] [<i>OID</i>...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v <B>1</B>|<B>2c</B>|<B>3</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use for the request. Most tests involve v2c or v3.<br><br><b>-c <B>COMMUNITY</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The community string required for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c authentication. Essential for basic connectivity tests.<br><br><b>-u <B>USER</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The security name (username) for SNMPv3 requests. Required for SNMPv3 authentication.<br><br><b>-l <B>LEVEL</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The security level for SNMPv3. Can be 'noAuthNoPriv', 'authNoPriv', or 'authPriv'.<br><br><b>-a <B>PROTOCOL</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The authentication protocol for SNMPv3 (e.g., MD5, SHA). Used with '-l authNoPriv' or '-l authPriv'.<br><br><b>-A <B>PASSPHRASE</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The authentication passphrase for SNMPv3. Used with '-a'.<br><br><b>-x <B>PROTOCOL</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The privacy protocol for SNMPv3 (e.g., DES, AES). Used with '-l authPriv'.<br><br><b>-X <B>PASSPHRASE</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The privacy passphrase for SNMPv3. Used with '-x'.<br><br><b>-t <B>TIMEOUT</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of seconds to wait before retransmitting a request. Useful for network latency tests.<br><br><b>-r <B>RETRIES</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of times to retry a request before giving up. Helps diagnose intermittent network issues.<br><br><b><B>AGENT</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The hostname or IP address of the target SNMP agent (e.g., 192.168.1.10, localhost).<br><br><b><B>OID</B>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more Object Identifiers (OIDs) to query or walk, represented as numeric or textual MIB names (e.g., .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0 for sysDescr.0).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term 'snmptest' typically refers to the process or a custom script used to verify the functionality of an SNMP agent and network connectivity to it. It is important to note that 'snmptest' is <B>not a standard standalone executable command</B> universally found in most Net-SNMP distributions. Instead, it commonly encapsulates the usage of other Net-SNMP tools like <I>snmpget</I>, <I>snmpwalk</I>, <I>snmpset</I>, and <I>snmpbulkwalk</I>. These underlying commands are used to query specific Object Identifiers (OIDs), walk MIB trees, or even set values, thereby confirming that an SNMP agent is running, reachable, and responding correctly to SNMP requests. A conceptual or custom 'snmptest' utility might automate a series of such queries or operations to provide a comprehensive health check or diagnostic report for an SNMP-enabled device.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The primary caveat is that <B>snmptest is not a universally standardized command</B>. Its functionality is typically implemented by scripting existing Net-SNMP utilities like <I>snmpget</I> or <I>snmpwalk</I>. Users should consult their system's documentation or the specific script's source if an 'snmptest' command is present, as its behavior and options may vary significantly.


title: TYPICAL SNMP TEST SCENARIOS
content:
When 'testing' SNMP, common scenarios include:<br><i>Agent Reachability</i>: Confirming the target agent responds to basic queries (e.g., fetching <i>sysDescr.0</i>).<br><i>Authentication/Privacy Verification</i>: Ensuring correct community strings (v1/v2c) or SNMPv3 credentials (user, auth/priv protocols/passphrases) are working.<br><i>MIB Tree Exploration</i>: Using commands like <i>snmpwalk</i> to discover available OIDs and their values, verifying the agent exposes expected data.<br><i>Performance Testing</i>: Measuring response times or the agent's ability to handle multiple concurrent requests (though this is more advanced and requires custom scripting).<br><i>Trap Reception Testing</i>: Ensuring the agent can send SNMP traps to a configured trap receiver (involves testing on the receiver side).


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of 'snmptest' evolved as a need to quickly verify SNMP agent responsiveness and configuration. Rather than a distinct command developed over time, it represents a common practice of using the flexible and powerful Net-SNMP command-line tools to perform diagnostic checks. Many system administrators and monitoring solutions incorporate their own custom 'snmptest' scripts to streamline routine SNMP health checks or troubleshoot connectivity issues.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snmpwalk</b> <i>[COMMON OPTIONS]</i> <i>AGENT</i> <i>[OID]</i><br><br><i>AGENT</i>: The hostname or IP address of the target SNMP agent.<br><i>OID</i>: The starting Object Identifier (e.g., 1.3.6.1.2.1.1 for system information). If omitted, the entire MIB tree (<i>iso</i>) is walked.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b> <i>&lt;1|2c|3&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use (v1, v2c, or v3).<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;COMMUNITY&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests (e.g., 'public', 'private').<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>&lt;USER&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the security name (username) for SNMPv3 authenticated requests.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>&lt;LEVEL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security level for SNMPv3 (<i>noAuthNoPriv</i>, <i>authNoPriv</i>, <i>authPriv</i>).<br><br><b><b>-a</b> <i>&lt;PROTOCOL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the authentication protocol for SNMPv3 (<i>MD5</i> or <i>SHA</i>).<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i>&lt;PROTOCOL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the privacy (encryption) protocol for SNMPv3 (<i>DES</i> or <i>AES</i>).<br><br><b><b>-A</b> <i>&lt;PASSPHRASE&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the authentication passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b><b>-X</b> <i>&lt;PASSPHRASE&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the privacy (encryption) passphrase for SNMPv3.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>&lt;TIMEOUT&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds before retransmitting a request (default: 1 second).<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>&lt;RETRIES&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of retries before giving up on the request (default: 5 retries).<br><br><b><b>-On</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays OIDs numerically (e.g., .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0).<br><br><b><b>-Os</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays OIDs symbolically (e.g., .iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib-2.system.sysDescr.0).<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>&lt;MIBSPEC&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies additional MIB modules to load for symbolic name resolution.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>snmpwalk</b> command is a powerful diagnostic and exploration tool within the Net-SNMP suite. It is used to query an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent running on a network device (e.g., router, switch, server) and retrieve information by traversing a Management Information Base (MIB) tree or a specific sub-tree. <br><br>Unlike <b>snmpget</b> which retrieves a single variable, <b>snmpwalk</b> performs a series of SNMP GETNEXT requests. It starts at a specified Object Identifier (OID) or the root of the MIB tree (if no OID is given) and walks through all subsequent OIDs, retrieving and displaying each variable name and its corresponding value until the end of the MIB sub-tree is reached or an error occurs. This makes it invaluable for discovering what information an agent provides and for auditing network device configurations and states.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>Ensure the target device's SNMP agent is running and accessible (default UDP port 161).</li><li>Firewall rules must permit SNMP traffic between the host running <b>snmpwalk</b> and the target agent.</li><li>Correct community strings (for SNMPv1/v2c) or SNMPv3 credentials (username, security level, passphrases) are critical for successful queries.</li><li>Walking large MIB trees can be time-consuming and resource-intensive on both the client and the agent.</li><li>If MIB files are not configured or available, OIDs may be displayed numerically instead of symbolically, making the output harder to interpret.</li></ul>


title: OID STRUCTURE AND MIBS
content:
SNMP uses a hierarchical naming scheme called Object Identifiers (OIDs), which are numerical sequences representing managed objects in a tree structure (e.g., <i>1.3.6.1.2.1</i> for <i>mib-2</i>). A MIB (Management Information Base) is a collection of definitions for managed objects. For <b>snmpwalk</b> to display meaningful symbolic names (like <i>sysDescr.0</i> instead of <i>1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0</i>), it relies on loaded MIB files that map OIDs to human-readable names. Without appropriate MIB files, output will be purely numeric.


title: COMMUNITY STRINGS VS. SNMPV3 SECURITY
content:
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c rely on 'community strings' for basic authentication, which are essentially clear-text passwords transmitted over the network. This offers no encryption or strong authentication and is considered insecure for sensitive data. <br><br>SNMPv3 significantly enhances security by introducing user-based security models. It supports authentication (using MD5 or SHA) to verify the sender's identity and encryption (using DES or AES) to protect data confidentiality during transit. This makes <b>snmpwalk</b> queries much more secure when using SNMPv3.


title: HISTORY
content:
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) was initially defined in the late 1980s as a standard for managing devices on IP networks. The <b>snmpwalk</b> command is a fundamental utility that emerged with the development of SNMP implementations. It is a core part of the Net-SNMP project (formerly UCD-SNMP), which has been a widely adopted open-source toolkit for SNMP. <br><br>Over time, SNMP evolved through versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c (introducing improvements like bulk retrieval and enhanced error handling), and SNMPv3 (adding crucial security features such as authentication and encryption). The <b>snmpwalk</b> command has adapted to support all these versions, reflecting the protocol's development and its continued importance in network management and monitoring.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>snort</b> [<b>-A</b> <i>&lt;mode&gt;</i>] [<b>-c</b> <i>&lt;rulesfile&gt;</i>] [<b>-i</b> <i>&lt;interface&gt;</i>] [<b>-l</b> <i>&lt;logdir&gt;</i>] [<b>-r</b> <i>&lt;pcapfile&gt;</i>] [<b>-D</b>] [<b>-T</b>] [<b>-q</b>] [<i>other_options</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-A</b> <i>&lt;mode&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the alert output mode (e.g., <i>full</i>, <i>fast</i>, <i>console</i>, <i>syslog</i>, <i>none</i>).<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;rulesfile&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Snort configuration file and rule set to use.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>&lt;interface&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Listens for packets on the specified network interface (e.g., <i>eth0</i>, <i>enp0s3</i>, <i>any</i>).<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>&lt;logdir&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the base logging directory where Snort will write alert and log files.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>&lt;pcapfile&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads packets from a tcpdump-format packet capture file for offline analysis.<br><br><b><b>-D</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs Snort in daemon mode, detaching from the controlling terminal.<br><br><b><b>-T</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs Snort in test mode, validating the configuration and rule set without analyzing live traffic.<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operates in quiet mode, suppressing the startup banner and most status messages.<br><br><b><b>--daq</b> <i>&lt;module&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Data Acquisition (DAQ) module to use (e.g., <i>pcap</i>, <i>afpacket</i>) for packet I/O.<br><br><b><b>--pcap-filter</b> <i>&lt;filter&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a Berkeley Packet Filter (BPF) to the input stream, filtering which packets Snort processes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snort</i> is a widely-used open-source network intrusion detection and prevention system (IDS/IPS). It performs real-time traffic analysis, packet logging, and content searching/matching on IP networks. Snort can detect a wide range of attacks and probes, including buffer overflows, stealth port scans, CGI attacks, SMB probes, and OS fingerprinting attempts.<br><br>It operates primarily in three modes: sniffer, packet logger, and network intrusion detection system (NIDS). In NIDS mode, Snort uses a flexible rule-based language to define attack signatures and detect suspicious activity. Its extensibility, powerful rule engine, and active community make it a cornerstone in network security monitoring and defense.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Snort can be resource-intensive, requiring careful tuning of rules to minimize false positives and negatives. Managing and updating rule sets regularly is crucial for effective detection.<br><br>While capable of Intrusion Prevention (IPS), this mode demands precise rule configuration to avoid legitimate traffic disruption and often requires specific Data Acquisition (DAQ) modules and network interface support.


title: OPERATING MODES
content:
Snort operates primarily in three distinct modes:<br><b>1. Sniffer Mode:</b> Reads network packets from the wire and displays them on the console, similar to <i>tcpdump</i>.<br><b>2. Packet Logger Mode:</b> Records packets to disk in a hierarchical directory structure based on IP addresses, suitable for later forensic analysis.<br><b>3. Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS) Mode:</b> This is Snort's most powerful mode, where it analyzes network traffic against a set of user-defined rules to detect and alert on suspicious or malicious activity.


title: RULE MANAGEMENT
content:
Snort's strength lies in its highly flexible and powerful rule language. Users can write custom rules to address specific threats or leverage widely available community-driven and commercial rule sets (e.g., Snort Subscriber Rules, Emerging Threats). Keeping these rules updated is critical for effective threat detection and adapting to new attack vectors.


title: HISTORY
content:
Snort was originally created by Martin Roesch in 1998 as a simple packet sniffer and logger. It quickly evolved into a robust network intrusion detection system (NIDS) and gained widespread adoption. Roesch later founded Sourcefire, which continued Snort's development. In 2013, Cisco Systems acquired Sourcefire, including the Snort project. Despite the acquisition, Snort remains an actively developed open-source project, continuing its legacy as a foundational tool in network security.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>AGENT</i>[:<i>PORT</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the hostname or IP address of the SNMP agent to query. Optionally, a port number can be appended after a colon. If omitted, it typically defaults to <i>localhost</i>.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> <i>VERSION</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SNMP protocol version to use (e.g., <i>1</i>, <i>2c</i>, or <i>3</i>). Defaults to a configured version, usually <i>3</i> if available.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>COMMUNITY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c requests, acting as a password for authentication.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>USER</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the security name for SNMPv3 requests. This is required for SNMPv3 authentication or privacy.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>LEVEL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the security level for SNMPv3 requests. Common levels include <i>noAuthNoPriv</i>, <i>authNoPriv</i>, and <i>authPriv</i>.<br><br><b><b>-a</b> <i>PROTOCOL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the authentication protocol for SNMPv3 (e.g., <i>MD5</i> or <i>SHA</i>).<br><br><b><b>-A</b> <i>PASSPHRASE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the authentication passphrase for SNMPv3 requests.<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i>PROTOCOL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the privacy protocol for SNMPv3 (e.g., <i>DES</i> or <i>AES</i>).<br><br><b><b>-X</b> <i>PASSPHRASE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the privacy passphrase for SNMPv3 requests.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>TIMEOUT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the timeout in seconds before retransmitting a request. Defaults to 1 second.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>RETRIES</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of retries before giving up on a request. Defaults to 0.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>snscore</i> is a utility included with the Net-SNMP suite, primarily used for debugging and monitoring the internal performance and health of the <i>snmpd</i> agent. It retrieves and displays "scores" which represent various internal metrics, such as the number of successful or failed SNMP requests, processing times, or other operational statistics. These scores help administrators identify bottlenecks, troubleshoot issues, or understand the workload on the SNMP agent. It communicates with the running <i>snmpd</i> process, typically via a UNIX domain socket or a local UDP port, to fetch this information.<br><br>Unlike general SNMP client tools like <i>snmpget</i>, <i>snscore</i> focuses specifically on the agent's internal diagnostic data rather than standard MIB objects. This makes it an invaluable tool for maintaining the stability and efficiency of an SNMP service by providing insights into its core operations and potential issues.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>snscore</i> connects directly to the <i>snmpd</i> agent's internal interface, which usually requires the agent to be running on the same host or configured to listen on a specific network interface. Its output is specific to the Net-SNMP implementation and may vary slightly between versions or configurations of <i>snmpd</i>. The 'scores' are internal diagnostic metrics and not part of the standard SNMP MIBs, meaning their interpretation relies on knowledge of Net-SNMP's internal workings.


title: SCORE INTERPRETATION
content:
The exact meaning of the scores displayed by <i>snscore</i> is internal to the <i>snmpd</i> agent and its loaded modules. They typically represent counts of successful operations, error conditions, or specific state transitions within the SNMP processing pipeline. Users should refer to Net-SNMP documentation or source code for precise interpretations of each score, as they are not standardized MIB objects.


title: PURPOSE AND USAGE
content:
While general SNMP clients like <i>snmpget</i> retrieve MIB variables, <i>snscore</i> serves a different, more specialized purpose: internal agent diagnostics. It is primarily used by administrators to:<br>- Monitor the agent's responsiveness and processing load.<br>- Identify potential internal bottlenecks or errors not visible through standard MIBs.<br>- Debug issues with SNMP request handling or MIB module performance.<br>- Verify the healthy operation of the <i>snmpd</i> service itself.<br>It's less of a command for routine monitoring and more of a tool for in-depth troubleshooting.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>snscore</i> is an integral part of the Net-SNMP (formerly UCD-SNMP) suite, a widely used collection of SNMP tools and libraries for Linux and Unix-like systems. The Net-SNMP project originated in the mid-1990s as UCD-SNMP, developed at the University of California, Davis. The <i>snscore</i> utility has been a consistent diagnostic feature within this suite, evolving alongside the core <i>snmpd</i> daemon to provide administrators with essential insights into its internal operations and performance. Its long-standing presence highlights its utility for maintaining SNMP service health.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>snyk test</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scans your local project for known vulnerabilities in its open-source dependencies. This is often the first command used to assess a project's security posture.<br><br><b><b>snyk monitor</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Takes a snapshot of your project's dependencies and uploads it to the Snyk platform for continuous monitoring. Snyk will then notify you of newly discovered vulnerabilities affecting your project.<br><br><b><b>snyk auth</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Authenticates the Snyk CLI with your Snyk account, allowing it to access your organization and projects on the Snyk platform.<br><br><b><b>snyk iac test</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scans Infrastructure as Code (IaC) files (e.g., Terraform, CloudFormation, Kubernetes, ARM) for security misconfigurations and best practice violations.<br><br><b><b>snyk container test</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scans local or remote container images for known vulnerabilities in their layers and packages. This command helps secure your containerized applications.<br><br><b><b>snyk code test</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scans your proprietary source code for security vulnerabilities and code quality issues using static application security testing (SAST) techniques.<br><br><b><b>--json</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the command results in JSON format, useful for programmatic processing and integration with other tools.<br><br><b><b>--severity-threshold=&lt;level&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters scan results to only show vulnerabilities at or above the specified severity level (<i>low</i>, <i>medium</i>, <i>high</i>, <i>critical</i>). Applies to <b>snyk test</b>, <b>snyk iac test</b>, etc.<br><br><b><b>--file=&lt;path&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to a manifest file (e.g., <i>package.json</i>, <i>pom.xml</i>, <i>requirements.txt</i>) or a specific IaC file to scan. By default, Snyk attempts to auto-detect.<br><br><b><b>--org=&lt;ID&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Snyk Organization ID to associate with the scan results. Essential when working with multiple Snyk organizations.<br><br><b><b>--all-projects</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When used with <b>snyk test</b>, this option instructs Snyk to find and test all projects within a given directory, rather than just the top-level one.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>Snyk CLI</b> is a powerful command-line interface tool that empowers developers to find and fix security vulnerabilities across their entire application stack. It integrates security into the development workflow by scanning open-source dependencies, proprietary code, container images, and infrastructure-as-code (IaC) configurations for known vulnerabilities and misconfigurations.<br><br>It supports a wide range of programming languages, package managers, and cloud environments, providing actionable remediation advice. The CLI is designed to be used locally during development, as well as integrated into Continuous Integration/Continuous Delivery (CI/CD) pipelines to automate security checks and prevent vulnerable code from reaching production.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>snyk</b> command generally requires an active internet connection to communicate with the Snyk vulnerability database and platform. Authentication via <b>snyk auth</b> is mandatory for most operations. Users should ensure they have the necessary permissions within their Snyk organization to perform certain actions, like uploading project snapshots.


title: AUTHENTICATION REQUIREMENT
content:
Before using most <b>snyk</b> commands, you must authenticate your CLI with your Snyk account. This is done by running <b>snyk auth</b>. The command will typically open your web browser to complete the authentication process securely. An authenticated CLI ensures that your scan results are associated with your Snyk organization and that you can access your project dashboards.


title: CI/CD INTEGRATION
content:
The <b>snyk</b> CLI is highly optimized for integration into Continuous Integration/Continuous Delivery (CI/CD) pipelines. Commands like <b>snyk test</b> and <b>snyk monitor</b> can be incorporated into build scripts to automatically scan code for vulnerabilities on every commit or build, helping to 'shift left' security and catch issues early in the development lifecycle.


title: HISTORY
content:
Snyk was founded in 2015 with a vision to empower developers to own application security. The Snyk CLI has been a cornerstone of this vision, designed from the outset to be developer-friendly and integrate seamlessly into existing workflows. It has continuously evolved, expanding its capabilities from initially focusing on open-source dependencies to covering proprietary code (Snyk Code), container images (Snyk Container), and Infrastructure as Code (Snyk IaC), reflecting the growing needs of modern software development.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sockstat</b> [-46CcLnpSu] [-P <i>protocols</i>] [-T <i>targets</i>] [-X <i>show</i>] [<i>ports ...</i>]<br><b>sockstat</b> -l


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-4</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only IPv4 sockets.<br><br><b><b>-6</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only IPv6 sockets.<br><br><b><b>-C</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only connected sockets.<br><br><b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only control sockets.<br><br><b><b>-L</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only listen sockets.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not attempt to resolve numeric host addresses or port numbers to symbolic names.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>protocols</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show sockets of specific protocols, e.g., 'tcp', 'udp', 'raw', 'unix'. Multiple protocols can be comma-separated.<br><br><b><b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show socket statistics, often related to buffer sizes and send/receive queues.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only 'streaming' sockets (e.g., TCP, SCTP, RAW sockets, but not UDP datagram sockets).<br><br><b><b>-T</b> <i>targets</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show sockets owned by specific target types, e.g., 'users', 'groups', 'pids'. Multiple types can be comma-separated.<br><br><b><b>-u</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only UDP sockets.<br><br><b><b>-X</b> <i>show</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show additional information. For example, 'u' can be used to display unlinked Unix domain sockets.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show only listening sockets, often presenting the output in a specific summary format (similar to <b>-L</b> but sometimes with different default columns).<br><br><b><i>ports ...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show sockets using the specified port numbers. Multiple ports can be listed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>sockstat</i> is a powerful utility primarily found on FreeBSD and other BSD-derived operating systems. Its main purpose is to display detailed information about open sockets, encompassing network connections (TCP, UDP, IP), Unix domain sockets, and raw sockets. For each socket, <i>sockstat</i> typically provides details such as the owning user and process ID (PID), the command associated with the PID, the file descriptor, protocol, send/receive queue sizes, local and foreign addresses, and the connection state (e.g., LISTEN, ESTABLISHED). This command is highly valuable for network troubleshooting, security auditing, and gaining insight into the network activity of processes running on a system.<br><br><b>Important Note:</b> <i>sockstat</i> is <b>not a standard command</b> on most Linux distributions. Linux users seeking similar functionality should utilize commands like <b>ss</b>, <b>netstat</b>, or <b>lsof</b>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The most significant caveat is that <i>sockstat</i> is a standard utility on FreeBSD and other BSD-based systems, but <b>it is not typically found on standard Linux distributions</b>. If you encounter <i>sockstat</i> on a Linux system, it's likely a custom port or a non-standard utility. For equivalent functionality on Linux, users should rely on commands such as <b>ss</b>, <b>netstat</b>, or <b>lsof</b>.<br><br>Accessing full information, especially about sockets owned by other users or raw sockets, often requires root privileges or appropriate capabilities.


title: TYPICAL OUTPUT COLUMNS
content:
When run without specific flags, <i>sockstat</i> typically displays columns such as:<br><b>USER</b>: The user who owns the socket.<br><b>COMMAND</b>: The command name of the process that owns the socket.<br><b>PID</b>: The Process ID of the owner.<br><b>FD</b>: The file descriptor number associated with the socket.<br><b>PROTO</b>: The protocol of the socket (e.g., TCP, UDP, stream, dgram, raw).<br><b>LOCAL ADDRESS</b>: The local address and port number.<br><b>FOREIGN ADDRESS</b>: The foreign address and port number for connected sockets.<br><b>STATE</b>: The state of the TCP connection (e.g., LISTEN, ESTABLISHED, CLOSE_WAIT). For other protocols, this column might show '---'.


title: PERMISSIONS
content:
To view all socket information, particularly for processes owned by other users or system-level sockets, <i>sockstat</i> generally requires root privileges or equivalent permissions. Running it as a non-root user might only show sockets owned by that specific user.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>sockstat</i> originated in the FreeBSD operating system as a dedicated utility to provide a detailed and granular view of open sockets. Its development stemmed from the need for a more comprehensive tool than existing utilities like <i>netstat</i> for inspecting socket-related activity, including process ownership and various socket types (Internet, Unix domain, raw). It has been a staple in FreeBSD for network diagnostics, security analysis, and system administration, evolving alongside the FreeBSD network stack.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>soelim</b> [<b>-C</b>] [<b>-I</b><i>directory</i>] [<b>-r</b>] [<b>-s</b>] [<b>-V</b>] [<b>--</b>] [<i>file</i> ...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-C</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recognizes lines starting with <i>.so</i> (with a dot) as well as <i>so</i> (without a dot) as source directives.<br><br><b><b>-I</b><i>directory</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>directory</i> to the search path for files referenced by <i>.so</i> directives. Multiple <b>-I</b> options can be used.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates recursive expansion of nested <i>.so</i> files. By default, <b>soelim</b> only expands the top-level directives.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Causes <b>soelim</b> to exit with a non-zero status code if any file specified in a <i>.so</i> directive cannot be opened or found.<br><br><b><b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version number of <b>soelim</b> to standard error and then exits.<br><br><b><b>--</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Marks the end of options, allowing subsequent arguments that begin with a hyphen to be treated as filenames rather than options.<br><br><b><i>file ...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more input files to be processed. If no files are specified, <b>soelim</b> reads from standard input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>soelim</b> command is a preprocessor for <b>groff</b> and other <b>roff</b>-like text formatting systems. Its primary function is to replace <i>.so</i> (source) directives within an input stream with the actual content of the files they refer to. This effectively "inlines" external files into the main document. It is particularly useful for preparing <b>man</b> pages or other structured documents that leverage modularity by breaking content into multiple files.<br><br>By expanding these directives before the document is passed to <b>groff</b>, <b>soelim</b> ensures that the final processing step receives a self-contained, single stream of data. This avoids potential issues where <b>groff</b> itself might not handle <i>.so</i> directives when outputting to standard output, or in environments where direct file system access during final rendering is restricted. It streamlines the document processing workflow, making modular document creation more robust.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When processing files with <i>.so</i> directives from untrusted sources, caution is advised. <b>soelim</b> can be coerced into reading arbitrary files on the system if malicious paths are embedded within the directives. Users should ensure input files are trustworthy before processing.


title: STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT
content:
If no input <i>file</i> arguments are provided, <b>soelim</b> reads its content from standard input. The processed output, with all <i>.so</i> directives expanded, is always written to standard output.


title: SEARCH PATH FOR FILES
content:
When <b>soelim</b> encounters a <i>.so</i> directive, it searches for the specified file in a defined order:<br>1. The current working directory.<br>2. Directories specified by any <b>-I</b><i>directory</i> options, in the order they appear.<br>3. Various standard <b>groff</b> macro directories, such as <i>/usr/lib/groff/tmac</i>, <i>/usr/share/groff/site-tmac</i>, and system-specific <i>/usr/share/groff/&lt;version&gt;/tmac</i> directories.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>soelim</b> is an integral part of the <b>groff</b> (GNU roff) text formatting system, which is the GNU Project's free software replacement for the proprietary <b>troff</b> typesetter. It was developed to provide a robust and standard way to handle <i>.so</i> file inclusion directives, particularly for the preparation of <b>man</b> pages. Its development ensured compatibility and functionality across various Unix-like systems, becoming a standard utility within the <b>groff</b> toolchain since its early versions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<br><b>solcjs</b> [<I>options</I>] <I>file</I>...<br><b>solcjs</b> <I>--standard-json</I><br><b>solcjs</b> <I>--help</I><br><b>solcjs</b> <I>--version</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current version of the <b>solcjs</b> compiler.<br><br><b>--optimize</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables the bytecode optimizer, which attempts to reduce transaction costs and contract size.<br><br><b>--bin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the compiled contract bytecode in hexadecimal format.<br><br><b>--abi</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the Application Binary Interface (ABI) for compiled contracts, essential for contract interaction.<br><br><b>--output-dir <dir></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a directory where all compilation output files should be written.<br><br><b>--base-path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the base path for resolving imports, often used for project root directories.<br><br><b>--include-path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds an additional path for resolving imports, useful for library dependencies.<br><br><b>--standard-json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instructs <b>solcjs</b> to accept a Standard JSON Input object from stdin and print a Standard JSON Output object to stdout. This is the recommended interface for programmatic use.<br><br><b>--pretty-json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Formats JSON output with indentation, making it more human-readable.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options and usage information.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>solcjs</b> is the command-line interface for the JavaScript implementation of the Solidity compiler. It enables developers to compile Solidity smart contracts directly from the command line, generating bytecode, ABI (Application Binary Interface), and other artifacts necessary for deploying and interacting with contracts on Ethereum-compatible blockchains. Being Node.js-based, <b>solcjs</b> is easily integrated into JavaScript development environments, build scripts, and CI/CD pipelines, offering a flexible alternative or complement to the C++-based <b>solc</b> compiler. It supports various compilation settings, including optimization, import path resolution, and detailed output selection, making it a crucial tool in modern blockchain development workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>solcjs</b> requires Node.js to be installed and available in the system's PATH. Complex projects with multiple source files and intricate import structures often benefit more from using the Standard JSON Input interface rather than direct file paths and `--include-path`/`--base-path` options, as it provides more robust import resolution and error reporting. Performance characteristics might differ slightly from the C++ <b>solc</b> compiler.


title: STANDARD JSON INPUT/OUTPUT
content:
For advanced and programmatic use, <b>solcjs</b> strongly recommends using the Standard JSON Input format. This allows developers to pass a comprehensive JSON object containing all source files, compiler settings, and output selections, receiving a structured JSON output. This method ensures robust and reproducible compilation across different environments and is the backbone of most high-level Solidity development frameworks.


title: INTEGRATION WITH DEVELOPMENT FRAMEWORKS
content:
Popular Ethereum development frameworks such as Truffle, Hardhat, and Brownie (via their underlying JS components) frequently utilize <b>solcjs</b> (or the <b>solc-js</b> npm package) behind the scenes for compiling smart contracts. These frameworks abstract away the complexities of direct <b>solcjs</b> command-line invocation, providing a streamlined development experience while leveraging the compiler's capabilities.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>solcjs</b> originated as the Node.js binding for the core Solidity compiler, aiming to provide a JavaScript-native interface to the powerful <b>solc</b> compilation engine. Its development was driven by the rapid growth of the Ethereum ecosystem and the increasing adoption of JavaScript/Node.js for decentralized application (dApp) development and blockchain tooling. By offering a familiar environment for compilation, <b>solcjs</b> significantly eased integration into existing web development workflows, build tools, and frameworks like Truffle and Hardhat, making Solidity contract compilation more accessible to a broader developer community primarily working with Node.js.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>solo</b> is <I>not</I> a standard utility found in most mainstream Linux distributions, such as Debian, Ubuntu, CentOS, Fedora, or Arch Linux. It is not part of the GNU Core Utilities, util-linux, or other widely adopted command-line tools. <br><br>Therefore, there is no universally defined functionality, set of options, or usage patterns for a command named <b>solo</b>. If you encounter or are looking for a command with this name, it likely originates from a custom script, a specific third-party application, a particular development environment, or a niche system. Its behavior would be entirely dependent on its specific implementation in that context, and it would not be generally available or predictable across different Linux systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>solo</b> command is not a standard utility distributed with major Linux distributions. Any functionality associated with <b>solo</b> would be specific to custom scripts, specialized applications, or niche environments where it might have been defined. Users should not expect <b>solo</b> to be present or function similarly across different Linux systems. <br><br>If you intend to use or develop such a command, ensure clear documentation of its purpose and parameters within its intended environment.


title: IDENTIFYING CUSTOM COMMANDS
content:
If you find <b>solo</b> on a specific system, you can try to locate its executable using commands like <b><I>which solo</I></b> or <b><I>type solo</I></b>. If it's a script, inspect its content using <b><I>cat $(which solo)</I></b>. If it's a binary, check its package origin (e.g., <b><I>dpkg -S $(which solo)</I></b> on Debian/Ubuntu or <b><I>rpm -qf $(which solo)</I></b> on RHEL/CentOS) to identify the application it belongs to. Refer to that application's documentation for details.


title: HISTORY
content:
No documented standard history exists for a <b>solo</b> command in general Linux development or widespread usage.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sonar-scanner</b> [<i>options</i>]<br><br>Common usage:<br><b>sonar-scanner</b> [-D<i>property</i>=<i>value</i> ...]<br><b>sonar-scanner</b> [--debug | -X]<br><b>sonar-scanner</b> [--help | -h]<br><b>sonar-scanner</b> [--version | -v]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-D&lt;property&gt;=&lt;value&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes a SonarQube analysis property to the scanner. This is the primary way to configure the analysis, overriding values specified in a <i>sonar-project.properties</i> file. Examples include <i>sonar.projectKey</i>, <i>sonar.sources</i>, <i>sonar.host.url</i>, and <i>sonar.token</i>.<br><br><b><i>-X</i>, <i>--debug</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug-level logging. This provides verbose output about the scanner's operations and interactions with the SonarQube server, which is extremely useful for troubleshooting analysis issues.<br><br><b><i>-h</i>, <i>--help</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message, listing available command-line options and basic usage information for the SonarQube Scanner.<br><br><b><i>-v</i>, <i>--version</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version of the SonarQube Scanner being used. This information can be helpful for compatibility checks, environment verification, and support requests.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>sonar-scanner</b> command is the universal command-line client used to analyze source code and send the analysis results to a SonarQube server. It is typically run from the root directory of a software project that needs to be analyzed. For a successful analysis, it requires a running SonarQube instance and either a <i>sonar-project.properties</i> file in the project's root or all necessary configuration properties passed directly as command-line arguments.<br><br>The scanner performs static code analysis, collects various metrics, identifies code smells, bugs, and vulnerabilities, and then pushes this aggregated data to the SonarQube server for detailed reporting, visualization, and management. It is a crucial component in continuous inspection workflows, enabling seamless integration with CI/CD pipelines to maintain and improve code quality and security standards.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>Requires a Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 11 or higher to execute.</li><li>Must be executed from the root directory of the project that is to be analyzed.</li><li>Network connectivity to the SonarQube server is essential for analysis results to be pushed and processed.</li><li>Authentication (typically via a <i>sonar.token</i> property) is often required for production SonarQube instances.</li><li>Project configuration, either through a <i>sonar-project.properties</i> file or direct command-line <i>-D</i> properties, is mandatory.</li></ul>


title: ANALYSIS PROPERTIES
content:
Most configuration for <b>sonar-scanner</b> is managed through SonarQube analysis properties. These properties can be defined in a <i>sonar-project.properties</i> file located within your project's root directory or supplied directly on the command line using the <i>-D&lt;property&gt;=&lt;value&gt;</i> syntax.<br><br>Common properties include <i>sonar.projectKey</i> (unique project identifier), <i>sonar.projectName</i>, <i>sonar.sources</i> (directories to analyze), <i>sonar.host.url</i> (SonarQube server address), and <i>sonar.token</i> (authentication token). It's important to note that properties provided on the command line always take precedence over those specified in the <i>sonar-project.properties</i> file.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>sonar-scanner</b> command evolved from earlier iterations known as <i>SonarQube Runner</i> and before that, <i>Sonar Runner</i>. It was officially renamed to <b>sonar-scanner</b> to more accurately reflect its primary function as a dedicated client for launching code analyses that integrate with the SonarQube platform. Its ongoing development focuses on providing a universal, standalone client for diverse project types, facilitating seamless integration with various build systems and CI/CD pipelines. It continues to be actively maintained and enhanced by SonarSource, the creators of SonarQube.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>sops</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>command</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br>Common commands:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>sops</i> <b>edit</b> [<i>file</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>sops</i> <b>decrypt</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>file</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>sops</i> <b>encrypt</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>file</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>sops</i> <b>updatekeys</b> [<i>file</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>sops</i> <b>set</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;path&gt; &lt;value&gt;</i> [<i>file</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>sops</i> <b>get</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;path&gt;</i> [<i>file</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-d, --decrypt</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decrypts the specified file. If no file is given, decrypts from standard input.<br><br><b>-e, --encrypt</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Encrypts the specified file. If no file is given, encrypts from standard input.<br><br><b>-i, --in-place</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Modifies the file in place. Used with `decrypt`, `encrypt`, `edit`, `set`, `updatekeys`.<br><br><b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force overwrite when writing output to a file.<br><br><b>--set <path> <value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a value at a specified path within the encrypted file.<br><br><b>--get <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieves a value from a specified path within the encrypted file.<br><br><b>--add-kms-key <key_ARN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds an AWS KMS key ARN to the file's encryption keys.<br><br><b>--add-pgp-key <fingerprint></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a PGP key fingerprint to the file's encryption keys.<br><br><b>--rotate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rotates the data key used for encryption.<br><br><b>--unencrypted-regex <regex></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a regex for keys whose values should remain unencrypted.<br><br><b>--input-type <type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly specifies the input file type (e.g., yaml, json, dotenv, binary).<br><br><b>--output-type <type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly specifies the output file type.<br><br><b>--config <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom configuration file for <i>sops</i>.<br><br><b>--kms-key <key_ARN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an AWS KMS key to use for encryption/decryption if not in file metadata.<br><br><b>--pgp-key <fingerprint></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a PGP key to use for encryption/decryption if not in file metadata.<br><br><b>--azkv <vault_url></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an Azure Key Vault URL to use.<br><br><b>--gcp-kms <key_path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a Google Cloud KMS key path to use.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the <i>sops</i> version and exits.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for <i>sops</i> or a specific command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>sops</i> (Secrets OPerationS) is an editor and a data encryption tool by Mozilla, designed specifically for encrypting, decrypting, and managing structured data files like YAML, JSON, ENV, INI, and binary files. Its primary use case is for managing sensitive configuration data in development, staging, and production environments, often within CI/CD pipelines.<br><br>Unlike general-purpose encryption tools, <i>sops</i> encrypts only the values within a structured file while preserving the keys and overall file structure. This allows for version control of encrypted configuration files, as changes to unencrypted parts (like variable names) do not require re-encryption of the entire file. When a <i>sops</i>-encrypted file is opened for editing, it decrypts the values on-the-fly, and re-encrypts them upon saving.<br><br><i>sops</i> supports multiple Key Management Systems (KMS) and methods, including AWS KMS, Google Cloud KMS, Azure Key Vault, HashiCorp Vault (via a plugin), and PGP. It stores the encryption metadata directly within the encrypted file, enabling seamless decryption by anyone with access to the appropriate decryption key. This makes it a powerful tool for secure secret management in cloud-native and DevOps workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>sops</i> is designed for structured data and might not be suitable for general-purpose binary file encryption where preserving structure isn't a concern. It relies on external key management systems (KMS or GPG), meaning the security of your secrets is ultimately tied to the security of these underlying systems and their access controls. Network connectivity is required for cloud-based KMS services. While <i>sops</i> aims to make secret management easy, misconfiguration of `--unencrypted-regex` or manual file editing outside of <i>sops</i> could inadvertently expose sensitive data.


title: FILE FORMAT MODIFICATION
content:
When <i>sops</i> encrypts a file, it adds a top-level <b>'sops'</b> key to the file (for YAML/JSON/INI) or a header (for binary/dotenv). This key contains metadata essential for decryption, including the data key encrypted by your chosen KMS/PGP keys, creation timestamps, and other versioning information. This means <i>sops</i>-encrypted files are not just raw encrypted blobs; they carry their decryption instructions with them.


title: KEY MANAGEMENT PHILOSOPHY
content:
<i>sops</i> itself does not manage cryptographic keys. Instead, it acts as an intermediary, leveraging existing, robust key management systems (like AWS KMS, GCP KMS, Azure Key Vault, or your local GPG setup) to encrypt and decrypt the symmetric data keys used for file content. This offloads the complex and critical task of key lifecycle management, rotation, and access control to specialized, hardened services or well-established PGP practices.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<i>sops</i> is widely used for:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;* Managing environment variables and configuration files containing API keys, database credentials, or other sensitive information in source control.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;* Encrypting Kubernetes Secrets definitions before applying them to a cluster, ensuring secrets are not stored in plaintext in Git.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;* Integrating with CI/CD pipelines to decrypt configuration files at deployment time, ensuring sensitive data is only exposed to authorized build agents.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;* Providing a secure way for development teams to share and collaborate on sensitive configuration data.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>sops</i> was developed by Mozilla to address the challenge of managing secrets in version-controlled configuration files, especially within automated deployment pipelines. It was initially released around 2016-2017, gaining traction as cloud-native architectures and DevOps practices became more prevalent. Its strength lies in its ability to integrate with various cloud provider KMS solutions and PGP, offering a flexible and secure way to handle sensitive data in environments like Kubernetes, Terraform, and Ansible. Over time, it has evolved with community contributions, adding support for more file formats and KMS providers, solidifying its position as a go-to tool for secret management in the modern software development landscape.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<br><code><I>sort</I> [OPTION]... [FILE]...</code><br><code><I>sort</I> [OPTION]... --files-from=F</code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-r, --reverse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Reverse the result of comparisons, sorting in descending order.<br><br><b>-n, --numeric-sort</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Compare according to string numerical value, useful for numbers.<br><br><b>-k POS1[,POS2], --key=POS1[,POS2]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Sort via a key; the key is the part of the line from POS1 to POS2 (inclusive). POS can specify field number and character position within field.<br><br><b>-u, --unique</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>With <I>-c</I>, check for strict ordering; without <I>-c</I>, output only the first of a run of multiple identical lines, effectively removing duplicates.<br><br><b>-o FILE, --output=FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Write the sorted result to FILE instead of standard output.<br><br><b>-f, --ignore-case, --fold-case</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Fold lower case characters to upper case characters when sorting, making comparisons case-insensitive.<br><br><b>-b, --ignore-leading-blanks</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Ignore leading blanks when determining the first non-blank character of a field for comparison.<br><br><b>-t SEP, --field-separator=SEP</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Use SEP instead of non-blank to blank transition as the field separator for <I>-k</I> option.<br><br><b>-V, --version-sort</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Sort text that contains version numbers, e.g., 'v1.0', 'v2.1', 'v10.0'.<br><br><b>-c, --check, --check=diagnose-first</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Check if input is already sorted; do not sort. Exit status is 0 if sorted, 1 otherwise.<br><br><b>-m, --merge</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Merge already sorted files; do not sort the input, only combine them into one sorted output.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br>Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>sort</b> command is a fundamental <I>Unix/Linux utility</I> used for rearranging the lines of text files in a defined order. It processes input from specified files or standard input and writes the sorted result to standard output or a designated file. By default, <b>sort</b> performs a <I>lexicographical sort</I> based on the entire line, comparing characters byte by byte. Its true power, however, lies in its extensive range of options, enabling users to specify complex sorting criteria.<br><br>Users can easily perform numeric sorting, reverse the order, ignore case, skip leading blanks, or sort based on specific fields (keys) within a line using custom delimiters. It's an indispensable tool for data preprocessing, log analysis, and preparing data for subsequent command-line operations. <b>sort</b> can also efficiently check if a file is already sorted or merge multiple pre-sorted files, making it a versatile cornerstone of shell scripting and command-line data manipulation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Memory Usage:</b> For very large files, <I>sort</I> may require significant temporary disk space if the data volume exceeds available RAM, potentially impacting performance.</li><li><b>Locale Dependency:</b> The sorting order can be heavily influenced by the current locale settings (e.g., <I>LC_ALL</I>, <I>LC_COLLATE</I>). Different locales might yield different sorted outputs, especially for non-ASCII characters. For byte-by-byte sorting, consider setting <I>LC_ALL=C</I>.</li><li><b>Key Definition Complexity:</b> Defining complex sort keys using <I>-k</I> can be intricate, especially when dealing with character positions, field numbers, and various modifiers within a single key definition.</li></ul>


title: LOCALE AND COLLATION
content:
The behavior of <I>sort</I> regarding character ordering is governed by the <I>LC_COLLATE</I> category of the current locale. If you need a consistent byte-by-byte sort (ASCII order), it is highly recommended to set the <I>LC_ALL</I> or <I>LC_COLLATE</I> environment variable to <I>C</I> or <I>POSIX</I> (e.g., <I>LC_ALL=C sort file.txt</I>). This ensures predictable results across different systems and locales.


title: STABLE SORT
content:
<I>sort</I> by default performs a <B>stable sort</B>. This means that if two lines compare as equal according to the specified sort keys, their original relative order is preserved. This feature is crucial when performing multiple sorting passes on data where the order of equal elements matters.


title: EFFICIENCY FOR LARGE FILES
content:
GNU <I>sort</I> is highly optimized for performance and can efficiently handle extremely large files. It often uses external merge sort algorithms when the entire dataset does not fit into memory. This involves breaking the data into smaller chunks, sorting each chunk, writing them to temporary files, and then merging these sorted chunks, making it suitable for big data tasks on a single machine.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>sort</I> command is one of the original utilities found in the <B>AT&T Unix operating system</B>, dating back to its earliest versions in the 1970s. It has been a core component of the <I>Unix philosophy</I> of small, focused tools that can be combined to perform complex tasks. Over decades, it has been reimplemented and enhanced in various Unix-like systems, including <I>GNU Coreutils</I> for Linux, adding more robust features like stable sorting, version sorting, and improved performance for very large datasets. Its consistent presence and powerful capabilities underscore its enduring utility in data processing.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s <field>, -k <field></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the field name by which the stanzas should be sorted. If this option is not provided, <i>sort-dctrl</i> defaults to sorting by the <b>Package</b> field. If the <b>Package</b> field is not present but the <b>Source</b> field is, it will sort by the <b>Source</b> field instead.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverses the order of the sort, producing output in descending order.<br><br><b>-u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs only unique stanzas. If multiple stanzas have the same value for the sorting field, only the first occurrence is kept.<br><br><b>--no-auto-compress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents <i>dctrl-tools</i> from automatically decompressing input files that are compressed (e.g., with gzip). By default, <i>sort-dctrl</i> will transparently handle compressed input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>sort-dctrl</i> command, part of the <i>dctrl-tools</i> suite, is designed to read and sort stanzas (paragraphs or entries) from Debian control files such as <i>Packages</i>, <i>Sources</i>, or <i>debian/control</i> files. It processes input from specified files or standard input, sorts the entries based on the content of a designated field (e.g., 'Package' or 'Source'), and then prints the sorted output to standard output. This utility is invaluable for maintaining consistent order in Debian repository metadata and package source definitions, which aids in version control, comparison, and automated processing of these files.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>sort-dctrl</i> relies on the input files conforming to the Debian control file format. It is not a general-purpose text sorter like <i>sort(1)</i>. While it can handle compressed input files by default, it does not write compressed output directly; output is always to standard output, which can then be piped to compression utilities like <i>gzip(1)</i> if needed.


title: USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
To sort a <i>Packages.gz</i> file by the <b>Package</b> field and output to standard output (which can then be redirected):<br><br><b>gzip -dc Packages.gz | sort-dctrl > SortedPackages</b><br><br>To sort a <i>debian/control</i> file by the <b>Source</b> field in reverse order and view the result:<br><br><b>sort-dctrl -k Source -r debian/control | less</b>


title: INPUT AND OUTPUT
content:
<i>sort-dctrl</i> reads from standard input if no file arguments are provided, or from the specified files. All sorted output is directed to standard output (<i>stdout</i>). This allows for easy piping with other command-line utilities for further processing, such as compression or filtering.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>sort-dctrl</i> is a component of the <i>dctrl-tools</i> package, a collection of utilities designed for parsing and manipulating Debian control files. These tools are fundamental to Debian's package management infrastructure and have been part of the distribution for a significant period, evolving alongside the Debian project itself to provide robust file handling capabilities for repository maintenance and package building processes.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>filename ...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more bibliographic database files to be sorted. If no filenames are provided, <i><b>sortbib</b></i> reads from standard input.<br><br><b><i>-skey</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the sorting key(s). <i>key</i> is a string of field-identifying characters (e.g., A, T, D for author, title, date). Each character represents a field by which records should be sorted. Multiple keys imply hierarchical sorting. A <b>+</b> before a key indicates ascending order, and a <b>-</b> indicates descending order. For example, <i><b>-s+A-T</b></i> sorts by author ascending, then by title descending.<br><br><b><i>-tstring</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the string that marks the start of a bibliographic record. By default, records are separated by blank lines. This option is useful if your records are delimited by a custom string, such as <b>%%</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>sortbib</b></i> is a Unix command-line utility designed to sort bibliographic database files. These files typically conform to the format expected by the <i>refer(1)</i> preprocessor, which is part of the <i>roff</i> and <i>groff</i> text formatting systems. Each bibliographic record is treated as a paragraph, separated by blank lines, and consists of fields marked by a percent sign (<b>%</b>) followed by a key letter (e.g., <b>%A</b> for author, <b>%T</b> for title, <b>%D</b> for date, <b>%J</b> for journal).<br><br>The primary purpose of <i><b>sortbib</b></i> is to order these records based on specified fields, such as author, title, or date, making it easier to manage and present bibliographies. By default, it sorts records primarily by author (<b>%A</b>), then by title (<b>%T</b>), and finally by date (<b>%D</b>), all in ascending order. Users can customize the sorting criteria using command-line options, allowing for complex multi-field sorting, including both ascending and descending orders. This tool is typically used as a pre-processing step before rendering documents that incorporate bibliographic citations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>sortbib</b></i> is a relatively old utility, primarily designed for use with the <i>refer(1)</i> preprocessor and the <i>roff</i>/<i>groff</i> text formatting system. It may not directly support modern bibliography formats like BibTeX, BibLaTeX, or CSL-JSON without prior conversion. Its functionality is specific to the <i>refer</i> format, where records are defined by <b>%key</b> pairs within paragraphs. Users working with contemporary academic writing tools often utilize more specialized bibliography management software.


title: INPUT FORMAT
content:
<i><b>sortbib</b></i> expects input files where each bibliographic record is separated by one or more blank lines. Within each record, fields are denoted by a percent sign (<b>%</b>) followed by a single uppercase letter, e.g., <b>%A</b> for author, <b>%T</b> for title, <b>%D</b> for date. Each field begins on a new line. For example:<br><br><b>%A</b> John Doe<br><b>%T</b> An Interesting Paper<br><b>%D</b> 2023<br><b>%J</b> Journal of Awesome Things<br><br><b>%A</b> Jane Smith<br><b>%T</b> Another Great Read<br><b>%D</b> 2022<br><b>%P</b> 123-145


title: TEMPORARY FILES
content:
During its operation, <i><b>sortbib</b></i> may create temporary files, typically in the <b>/tmp</b> directory, with names similar to <b>/tmp/sortbib*</b>. These files are usually removed automatically upon completion.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>sortbib</b></i> is a legacy Unix utility, originating from the early days of AT&T Unix as part of the <i>troff</i> typesetting suite. Its development was closely tied to the <i>refer</i> preprocessor, which allowed users to embed bibliographic citations directly into text documents formatted with <i>troff</i> or <i>nroff</i>. Over the decades, while <i>troff</i>/<i>roff</i> evolved into <i>groff</i> on Linux systems, <i><b>sortbib</b></i> has remained largely unchanged, serving its niche role in the <i>roff</i> ecosystem. Its design reflects the computing environment of its time, emphasizing plain text files and command-line pipeline processing.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print version information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--config</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative configuration file. The default is <code>soupault.conf</code>.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>&lt;dir&gt;</i>, <b>--output-dir</b> <i>&lt;dir&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output directory for generated files. The default is <code>_site</code>.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>&lt;dir&gt;</i>, <b>--site-dir</b> <i>&lt;dir&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the input directory for source files. The default is the current directory (<code>.</code>).<br><br><b><b>-w</b>, <b>--watch</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Watch for file changes in the input directory and rebuild the site automatically.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--force-external-deps</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force recompilation of Lua plugins if their external dependencies change.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>&lt;level&gt;</i>, <b>--log-level</b> <i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the log level (e.g., <code>info</code>, <code>debug</code>, <code>warning</code>, <code>error</code>).<br><br><b><b>--init</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initialize a new <i>soupault</i> project in the current directory, creating a default configuration file.<br><br><b><b>--build-only-page</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only build a specific page from the input directory.<br><br><b><b>--no-dump-full-config</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not dump the full configuration to standard error during execution.<br><br><b><b>--no-pretty-print-html</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable pretty-printing of the HTML output, resulting in more compact files.<br><br><b><b>--strict</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Abort execution on non-critical errors, enforcing stricter error handling.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>soupault</i> is a flexible static site generator written in OCaml, primarily designed for transforming and enhancing existing HTML files. Unlike many traditional static site generators that focus on creating content from templates, <i>soupault</i> operates on the principle of HTML tree manipulation.<br><br>It allows users to select specific HTML elements using CSS selectors and apply various operations such as content insertion, attribute modification, element removal, and reordering. Its power stems from its highly configurable <code>soupault.conf</code> file, which defines the rules for these transformations. Furthermore, it supports embedding Lua scripts for more complex, programmatic content generation or manipulation, making it a powerful tool for sophisticated website builds or for adding dynamic-like features to static content. It is particularly useful for incrementally adding features to existing HTML-based sites without requiring a full rewrite.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>soupault</i> relies heavily on CSS selectors; familiarity with them is crucial for effective configuration. While powerful, extensive Lua scripting can introduce complexity if not carefully managed. It is important to note that <i>soupault</i> is not a full-fledged templating engine like Jinja2 or Liquid; its primary focus is on HTML post-processing and transformation.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (<CODE>SOUPAULT.CONF</CODE>)
content:
The core of <i>soupault</i>'s operation is its declarative configuration file, <code>soupault.conf</code>, typically written in TOML format. This file defines a series of "rules" that specify which HTML elements to target (using CSS selectors) and what transformations to apply to them. Rules can range from simple content replacement to more complex operations involving external files, Markdown conversion, or embedded Lua scripts. This declarative approach makes site transformations highly manageable and auditable.


title: LUA SCRIPTING
content:
<i>soupault</i> allows embedding Lua scripts directly within the configuration file or as external files. This provides a powerful mechanism for highly custom and dynamic content generation or manipulation that goes beyond the capabilities of the declarative rules. Lua scripts can interact with the HTML document tree, access configuration variables, perform arbitrary computations, and integrate with external data sources, offering immense flexibility for complex site builds.


title: HTML-CENTRIC TRANSFORMATIONS
content:
Unlike many static site generators that primarily process Markdown or other text formats into HTML via templates, <i>soupault</i> primarily works by parsing existing HTML files into an Abstract Syntax Tree (AST) and then applying transformations directly to this tree. This makes it exceptionally well-suited for modifying, enriching, or restructuring HTML content that might have been generated by other tools, existing CMS exports, or created manually, providing a unique 'post-processing' capability.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>soupault</i> was created by <i>Vladimir Panteleev</i> (dmb) and first released around 2018. Its development was motivated by a desire for a static site generator that focused on HTML transformation rather than pure templating. This approach aimed to provide greater flexibility in modifying existing HTML structures, making it easier to add features or standardize elements across a site without requiring a complete content rewrite into a specific templating language. It has gained popularity for its unique HTML-centric approach and its extensibility via Lua scripting.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<pre><B>source</B> <I>FILENAME</I> [<I>ARGUMENTS</I>...]<BR><B>.</B> <I>FILENAME</I> [<I>ARGUMENTS</I>...]</pre>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>source</B> command (or its POSIX equivalent, <B>.</B> the dot command) is a shell builtin that reads and executes commands from a file in the <B>current shell context</B>. Unlike executing a script directly (e.g., <I>./myscript.sh</I>), which typically creates a <I>subshell</I> for execution, <B>source</B> ensures that any commands, variable assignments, function definitions, or alias creations within the specified file directly affect the <I>current interactive or non-interactive shell session</I>.<BR>This means changes made to environment variables (e.g., <I>PATH</I>), shell options, or user-defined functions and aliases persist after the script finishes. It is commonly used to reload configuration files like <I>.bashrc</I>, <I>.profile</I>, or <I>.zshrc</I> without needing to restart the shell, or to set up environment variables for a project.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>Security Risk</B>: Sourcing scripts from untrusted sources is highly dangerous as they execute with the full permissions and context of your current shell, potentially modifying your environment, executing arbitrary commands, or even deleting files.<BR><B>Persistent Changes</B>: Be aware that all changes made by the sourced script (variable assignments, function definitions, aliases, shell options) will remain active in your current shell. This is its primary purpose but can lead to unexpected behavior if not managed carefully.<BR><B>Error Handling</B>: If the sourced script encounters an error or exits, the sourcing shell will typically continue execution unless specific error handling (like <I>set -e</I> within the sourced script) is in place.<BR><B>Shell Differences</B>: While <B>.</B> is POSIX compliant across shells (Bash, Zsh, Dash, Ksh), the <B>source</B> command itself is a Bash and Zsh builtin. In <I>sh</I> (which might be a symlink to <I>dash</I>), only <B>.</B> is guaranteed to work.


title: DIFFERENCE FROM DIRECT EXECUTION
content:
When a script is executed directly (e.g., <I>./script.sh</I> or <I>bash script.sh</I>), it typically runs in a <I>new subshell</I>. This means any variables, functions, or aliases defined within that script are local to the subshell and disappear once the script finishes. <B>source</B> bypasses this, making its changes persistent in the <I>parent shell</I>.


title: COMMAND PARAMETERS
content:
<B>FILENAME</B>: The path to the script or file to be executed. If no directory is specified, the shell typically searches the current directory and then directories listed in the <I>PATH</I> environment variable.<BR><B>ARGUMENTS</B>: Optional arguments passed to the sourced script. These arguments become the positional parameters (<I>$1</I>, <I>$2</I>, etc.) within the sourced script.


title: RETURN STATUS
content:
The exit status of <B>source</B> (or <B>.</B>) is the exit status of the last command executed within the sourced file. If the file cannot be read or found, the return status is non-zero.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of executing a script in the current shell environment has been fundamental to Unix shells for a long time. The <B>.</B> (dot) command is defined by the <B>POSIX standard</B> and is available in virtually all compliant shells (like Bash, Zsh, Ksh, Dash). The <B>source</B> command, while serving the same purpose, is an extension primarily found as a <B>builtin</B> in shells like Bash and Zsh. Its inclusion makes the command name more descriptive for users coming from other environments or for readability. Its usage has remained consistent: enabling shell configuration and environment setup without spawning new processes.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>sox</I> [<I>global options</I>] <I>infile</I> [<I>infile</I> ...] [<I>format options</I>] <I>outfile</I> [<I>effect</I> [<I>effect options</I>] ...]<br><br>To play audio:<br><I>sox</I> [<I>global options</I>] <I>infile</I> [<I>infile</I> ...] <I>-d</I> | <I>--play</I> [<I>effect</I> [<I>effect options</I>] ...]<br><br>To record audio:<br><I>sox</I> [<I>global options</I>] <I>-d</I> | <I>--record</I> [<I>format options</I>] <I>outfile</I> [<I>effect</I> [<I>effect options</I>] ...]<br><br><I>infile</I> and <I>outfile</I> can be paths to audio files, or special names like <I>-</I> (standard input/output), <I>/dev/null</I>, or device drivers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message with a list of options and effects.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version information of SoX.<br><br><b>-D, --no-dither</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables dithering during sample rate or bit-depth conversions.<br><br><b>-q, --no-show-progress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses the display of the processing progress bar.<br><br><b>-S, --show-progress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the display of the processing progress bar, even in quiet mode.<br><br><b>-v <volume>, --volume <volume></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adjusts the input volume by a given factor (e.g., 0.5 for half, 2.0 for double). Can also be a percentage or dB value.<br><br><b>-r <rate>, --rate <rate></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the sample rate for the input or output file (e.g., 44100, 48000).<br><br><b>-c <channels>, --channels <channels></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of audio channels (e.g., 1 for mono, 2 for stereo).<br><br><b>-b <bits>, --bits <bits></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of bits per sample (e.g., 8, 16, 24, 32).<br><br><b>-t <type>, --type <type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly specifies the audio file type or driver to use (e.g., wav, mp3, flac, alsa).<br><br><b>-d, --default-device</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Special input/output pseudo-file name to use the default audio playback/recording device (for --play or --record).<br><br><b>--input-buffer <size></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the input buffer size, useful for streaming or slow devices.<br><br><b>fade <type> <start> <length> [<end-length>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a fade-in and/or fade-out effect to the audio. <I>type</I> can be 'h' (half-sine), 'q' (quarter-sine), 't' (triangular), etc.<br><br><b>norm [<level>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Normalizes the audio to a given peak level (default -3dB). Helps achieve a consistent volume level throughout the audio.<br><br><b>trim <start> [<length>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Trims audio, removing parts before <I>start</I> and/or after <I>start</I> + <I>length</I>.<br><br><b>reverse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverses the audio samples, playing the audio backward.<br><br><b>speed <factor></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes the audio speed (and pitch) by a given <I>factor</I> (e.g., 1.5 for 150% speed). For pitch change without tempo, use the 'pitch' effect.<br><br><b>pitch <semitones></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes the pitch of the audio by a given number of <I>semitones</I> without affecting its tempo.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>SoX</I>, short for <B>S</B>ound e<B>X</B>change, is a powerful and versatile command-line utility for digital audio processing. It can convert audio files between various popular formats, apply a wide range of audio effects, and even play or record audio directly from your system's sound devices. Often referred to as "the Swiss Army knife of sound processing," <I>SoX</I> supports an extensive list of file formats (e.g., WAV, MP3, FLAC, OGG, AIFF) and codecs. It's widely used in scripting for batch conversions, sound design, cleaning up audio, and preparing audio for web or video applications. Its robust feature set and cross-platform availability make it an indispensable tool for audio enthusiasts, developers, and system administrators working with audio files.


title: CAVEATS
content:
SoX can be quite resource-intensive for large files or complex effect chains. While highly versatile, its command-line interface can be complex for new users due to the multitude of options and effect parameters. Users may need to install additional libraries (like <I>libmp3lame</I> for MP3 encoding or <I>libflac</I> for FLAC) for full format support, depending on their distribution's default <I>SoX</I> package. It is primarily a batch processing tool and less suited for very low-latency real-time audio applications.


title: EXTENSIVE FORMAT SUPPORT
content:
<I>SoX</I> supports an impressive array of audio file formats, including common ones like WAV, MP3, FLAC, OGG, AIFF, AU, and many more obscure or legacy types. This makes it an ideal tool for interoperability between different audio systems or software.


title: CHAINING EFFECTS
content:
One of <I>SoX</I>'s powerful features is the ability to chain multiple audio effects together in a single command. Effects are applied sequentially from left to right, allowing for complex audio transformations with a single invocation. For example, `sox input.wav output.mp3 trim 10 5 norm reverse` will trim, normalize, and then reverse 5 seconds of audio starting at the 10-second mark.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>SoX</I> development began in 1991, originally created by Lance Norskog. It quickly gained popularity as a robust and open-source solution for audio file format conversion on Unix-like systems. Over the decades, it has been continuously maintained and expanded by a dedicated community, adding a vast array of audio effects and support for numerous modern and legacy audio formats. Its longevity and consistent development have cemented its place as a cornerstone utility in the Linux and open-source audio ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help message and exit.<br><br><b>-V[level]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information or set verbosity level.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the sample rate of the audio file.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the number of audio channels.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the total number of samples.<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the duration in HH:MM:SS.frac format.<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the duration in seconds.<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the audio file type (format).<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display all common information (duration, sample rate, channels, etc.).<br><br><b>-e</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the encoding type (e.g., FLAC, PCM, A-law).<br><br><b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the bits per sample (bit depth).<br><br><b>-B</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the average bit-rate.<br><br><b>-C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display all available comment fields or tags.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>soxi</i> is a powerful utility from the <b>SoX</b> (Sound eXchange) package, often referred to as the 'Swiss Army knife of sound processing'. Its primary function is to display detailed information about audio files without processing or playing the audio data itself. This includes crucial metadata such as duration, sample rate, number of channels, bit depth, encoding type, and various format-specific details. <br>It provides a quick, lightweight, and efficient way to inspect audio file properties, making it an invaluable tool for scripting, automated audio processing workflows, and rapid troubleshooting. <i>soxi</i> boasts extensive support for a wide array of audio file formats, offering a consistent and reliable interface for querying metadata across diverse audio types, from common formats like WAV and MP3 to more specialized ones.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>soxi</i> relies on the <i>libsox</i> library for parsing, so its capabilities are limited to the formats and features supported by the SoX project. <br>Information such as average bit-rate for Variable Bit Rate (VBR) formats might be an estimation rather than an exact value. <br>It primarily extracts header and metadata information and does not perform a full integrity check or validate the actual audio content.


title: COMMON USAGE
content:
<i>soxi</i> is frequently used in shell scripts for automated audio file analysis, such as sorting files by duration, verifying sample rates, or checking format compatibility before further processing. For interactive use, it offers a quick and convenient way to inspect audio properties directly from the command line before playback, conversion, or editing.


title: SUPPORTED FORMATS
content:
Inheriting <b>SoX</b>'s robust capabilities, <i>soxi</i> supports an extensive array of audio file formats. This includes common formats like WAV, MP3, FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, AIFF, AU, and more specialized types like GSM, raw PCM, and various ADPCM formats, making it a highly versatile tool for diverse audio workflows and collections.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>soxi</i> is a component of the <b>SoX</b> (Sound eXchange) project, which originated in the late 1980s by Lance Norskog. The project aimed to provide a comprehensive toolset for audio file manipulation across various operating systems. <i>soxi</i> emerged as a dedicated, lightweight utility within this suite, specifically designed to quickly query and display metadata from audio file headers without invoking the full audio processing capabilities of the main <i>sox</i> command. Its development has mirrored the evolution of the broader SoX project, continuously adapting to new audio formats, codecs, and metadata standards.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>spark-submit</b> <i>[options]</i> &lt;application jar | python file | R file&gt; <i>[application arguments]</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--master &lt;master_url&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The URL of the master for the cluster (e.g., <i>local</i>, <i>yarn</i>, <i>spark://host:port</i>).<br><br><b><b>--deploy-mode &lt;client|cluster&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Whether to deploy the driver program on the client machine (<i>client</i>) or on a worker node inside the cluster (<i>cluster</i>).<br><br><b><b>--class &lt;main_class&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The main class of your application (required for Java/Scala applications).<br><br><b><b>--name &lt;name&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A descriptive name for your Spark application, visible in the Spark UI.<br><br><b><b>--conf &lt;key=value&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Arbitrary Spark configuration properties in key=value format. Can be specified multiple times.<br><br><b><b>--executor-memory &lt;amount&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Amount of memory to use per executor process (e.g., <i>1G</i>, <i>512M</i>).<br><br><b><b>--num-executors &lt;num&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of executors to launch for the application.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Apache Spark is a unified analytics engine for large-scale data processing. While there isn't a single "spark" command in the same way <b>ls</b> or <b>grep</b> exist in Linux, users primarily interact with Spark through client scripts like <b>spark-submit</b>. This script is the core utility for launching any Spark application on a cluster. It handles the submission of applications written in Scala, Java, Python, or R to various cluster managers such as YARN, Mesos, Kubernetes, or Spark's own standalone manager. The <b>spark-submit</b> command manages the configuration of the application's resources, dependencies, and its entry point, then dispatches it for distributed execution. It's an essential tool for deploying and running complex distributed data processing workloads with Spark, simplifying what would otherwise be intricate cluster management details for developers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The term "spark" in the context of Linux typically refers to the Apache Spark distributed computing framework, not a standalone native Linux command like <b>ls</b>. Users interact with Spark primarily through wrapper scripts like <b>spark-submit</b>, <b>spark-shell</b>, or <b>pyspark</b>. Using these commands requires a pre-installed Apache Spark distribution and a Java Runtime Environment (JRE), along with Python or R for respective language applications. The specific behavior and available options of <b>spark-submit</b> can vary slightly depending on the Spark version and the underlying cluster manager being used.


title: CLUSTER MANAGERS
content:
<b>spark-submit</b> is agnostic to the cluster manager, allowing applications to run seamlessly on Spark's own standalone cluster manager, YARN (Yet Another Resource Negotiator), Apache Mesos, or Kubernetes. The <b>--master</b> option specifies which manager to connect to.


title: APPLICATION PACKAGING
content:
Spark applications for Java/Scala are typically packaged as JAR files, while Python applications are `.py` files, often with additional `.zip`, `.egg`, or `.py` files for dependencies. <b>spark-submit</b> facilitates the distribution of these artifacts to the cluster nodes.


title: HISTORY
content:
Apache Spark originated at UC Berkeley's AMPLab in 2009 and was open-sourced in 2010. It was designed to address the limitations of Hadoop MapReduce, particularly its disk-intensive operations and challenges with iterative algorithms. Spark's in-memory processing capabilities quickly led to superior performance. It became a top-level Apache Software Foundation project in 2014. The <b>spark-submit</b> script, alongside other client utilities like <b>spark-shell</b>, has been a foundational part of its ecosystem from early development, providing a consistent and user-friendly interface to launch and manage distributed applications without directly handling complex JVM processes or cluster resource allocation.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i><br>Note: This is a hypothetical synopsis as 'spatial' is not a standard command.</i><br><br><b>spatial</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;subcommand&gt;</i> [<i>subcommand_options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>subcommand</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A specific action to perform. Hypothetical examples include <b>info</b> (display metadata), <b>convert</b> (change format/CRS), <b>transform</b> (apply geometric operations), or <b>query</b> (perform spatial selections).<br><br><b><b>--help</b>, <b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the general help message or help for a specific subcommand.<br><br><b><b>--version</b>, <b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the hypothetical version information of the utility.<br><br><b><b>--input</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>-i</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the input spatial data file (e.g., shapefile, GeoJSON).<br><br><b><b>--output</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>-o</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path for the output spatial data file.<br><br><b><b>--format</b> <i>&lt;fmt&gt;</i>, <b>-f</b> <i>&lt;fmt&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the desired input or output data format (e.g., 'GeoJSON', 'ESRI Shapefile').<br><br><b><b>--srid</b> <i>&lt;code&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Spatial Reference ID (SRID) for coordinate system definitions (e.g., '4326' for WGS84).<br><br><b><b>--crs</b> <i>&lt;proj_string&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) using a PROJ string or well-known identifier.<br><br><b><b>--bbox</b> <i>&lt;xMin,yMin,xMax,yMax&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filters input data by a bounding box, useful for spatial subsetting.<br><br><b><b>--sql</b> <i>&lt;query&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows executing a SQL-like spatial query against the input data.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>spatial</b> is not a standard, widely recognized Linux utility found in typical distributions. This analysis is therefore based on a hypothetical concept of what such a command *would* entail if it existed as a general-purpose tool for spatial data processing from the command line.<br><br>If it were a real utility, <b>spatial</b> would likely serve as a versatile interface for manipulating, transforming, analyzing, and querying geospatial data. Its primary function would be to simplify common spatial operations that often require complex workflows with specialized Geographic Information Systems (GIS) software or programming libraries. It would aim to provide a streamlined way to interact with various spatial data formats (e.g., Shapefile, GeoJSON, KML, GML) and handle different Coordinate Reference Systems (CRS) and spatial projections. Possible operations would include geometric transformations (e.g., buffering, intersection, union), spatial queries (e.g., point-in-polygon, nearest neighbor), data conversions, and metadata inspection, making geospatial tasks accessible in shell scripts or automated workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The primary caveat is that <b>spatial</b> is not a standard Linux command; it does not typically come pre-installed or is part of common Linux distributions. Any reference to its functionality is purely hypothetical. Users seeking spatial data processing on Linux should explore established tools like GDAL/OGR, PostGIS, GRASS GIS, or dedicated Python libraries (e.g., GeoPandas, Shapely) that provide robust and widely supported functionalities.


title: ACTUAL SPATIAL TOOLS ON LINUX
content:
While <b>spatial</b> is hypothetical, Linux is a powerful platform for geospatial data processing. Key tools and libraries include:<br><br><b>GDAL/OGR</b>: A fundamental library for reading and writing raster and vector geospatial data formats.<br><b>PostGIS</b>: A spatial extension for PostgreSQL, enabling powerful spatial database capabilities.<br><b>GRASS GIS</b>: A comprehensive open-source GIS software suite for managing, processing, and analyzing geospatial data.<br><b>QGIS</b>: A popular open-source desktop GIS application that also integrates with many command-line tools.<br><b>SpatiaLite</b>: Spatial extensions for SQLite, providing lightweight spatial database functionality.<br><b>Python Libraries</b>: Packages like GeoPandas, Shapely, Fiona, Rasterio, and PyProj offer extensive spatial data manipulation capabilities via scripting.


title: COMMON SPATIAL OPERATIONS
content:
A hypothetical <b>spatial</b> command would likely support operations such as:<br><br><b>Projections/Transformations</b>: Converting data between different Coordinate Reference Systems.<br><b>Geometric Operations</b>: Buffering (creating areas around features), intersections, unions, differences, and simplified geometries.<br><b>Spatial Queries</b>: Selecting features based on their spatial relationship to other features (e.g., 'contains', 'intersects', 'within').<br><b>Attribute Management</b>: Adding, removing, or modifying non-spatial data associated with spatial features.


title: HISTORY
content:
As this command does not exist as a standard Linux utility, its history is purely speculative. A conceptual 'spatial' command would likely emerge from the desire to simplify complex geospatial operations, acting as a high-level wrapper for powerful underlying C/C++ libraries (like GEOS or PROJ.4) or established GIS toolkits (like GDAL/OGR). Its development would be driven by the need for more accessible command-line geospatial workflows, perhaps inspired by other domain-specific CLI tools.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>#include &lt;spawn.h&gt;</b><br><b>int posix_spawn(pid_t *restrict pid, const char *restrict path, const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *restrict file_actions, const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict attrp, char *const argv[restrict], char *const envp[restrict]);</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>pid_t *restrict pid</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A pointer to a <b>pid_t</b> variable where the process ID of the newly created child process will be stored upon successful return.<br><br><b><b>const char *restrict path</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the executable file that the new child process will run. This must be an absolute or relative path to a regular executable file.<br><br><b><b>const posix_spawn_file_actions_t *restrict file_actions</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A pointer to a structure that specifies a series of file descriptor actions (e.g., <b>open</b>, <b>close</b>, <b>dup2</b>) to be performed in the child process before it executes the new program. Can be <b>NULL</b> if no special actions are needed.<br><br><b><b>const posix_spawnattr_t *restrict attrp</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A pointer to a structure that specifies various attributes for the new process, such as process group, signal mask, scheduling policy, and flags. Can be <b>NULL</b> if default attributes are desired.<br><br><b><b>char *const argv[restrict]</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An array of pointers to null-terminated strings, representing the argument list for the new process. The last element of this array must be a <b>NULL</b> pointer.<br><br><b><b>char *const envp[restrict]</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An array of pointers to null-terminated strings, representing the environment for the new process. Each string should be of the form 'KEY=VALUE'. The last element of this array must be a <b>NULL</b> pointer.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>posix_spawn</b> function is a POSIX-standardized interface for creating new processes, designed as a more robust and often more efficient alternative to the traditional combination of <b>fork()</b> and <b>execve()</b>. While not a direct command-line utility, it's a fundamental C library function widely used in Linux and Unix-like operating systems for programmatically launching other executables.<br><br>Unlike <b>fork()</b> which duplicates the current process (including its memory space), followed by <b>execve()</b> to replace the child's memory with the new program, <b>posix_spawn</b> combines these steps into a single atomic operation. This can lead to significant performance benefits, especially in scenarios where the parent process has a large memory footprint, as it avoids unnecessary memory copying. It also provides a cleaner way to specify file descriptor actions (like closing or redirecting) and process attributes (like signal masks or scheduling policies) for the new child process before it even starts executing.<br><br>Its primary use is within C/C++ applications that need to launch external programs in a controlled and efficient manner, particularly in multi-threaded environments where <b>fork()</b> can introduce complexities due to its interaction with threads and mutexes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>posix_spawn</b> is a C library function, not a command-line utility executable directly from a shell. Its usage is confined to programming in C/C++ or other languages with bindings to libc. While generally more efficient, the exact performance benefits compared to <b>fork</b>/<b>exec</b> can vary depending on the specific operating system and workload. Correct handling of the <b>posix_spawn_file_actions_t</b> and <b>posix_spawnattr_t</b> structures requires careful initialization and understanding of their respective functions (e.g., <b>posix_spawn_file_actions_init()</b>, <b>posix_spawnattr_init()</b>).


title: RETURN VALUE
content:
Upon successful completion, <b>posix_spawn</b> returns 0. Otherwise, an error number is returned, and no child process is created. Standard error numbers like <b>EACCES</b>, <b>ENOENT</b>, <b>ENOMEM</b>, etc., may be returned.


title: ADVANTAGES OVER FORK/EXEC
content:
<b>posix_spawn</b> offers several advantages:<br>1. <i>Efficiency</i>: Can be significantly faster, especially for large parent processes, as it may avoid copying the entire address space that <b>fork()</b> typically performs.<br>2. <i>Atomicity</i>: Combines the two operations into one, reducing race conditions.<br>3. <i>Resource Management</i>: Provides a cleaner interface for configuring file descriptors and process attributes before the new program starts.<br>4. <i>Multithreaded Safety</i>: Generally safer to use in multi-threaded applications compared to <b>fork()</b> which has limitations on what can be safely called between the <b>fork()</b> and <b>exec()</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>posix_spawn</b> function was introduced as part of the POSIX.1-2001 standard. Its primary motivation was to provide a more efficient and robust method for process creation, especially to address the performance overhead associated with <b>fork()</b> (which involves copying the parent's address space) and to offer a safer alternative in multi-threaded programs where <b>fork()</b>'s behavior can be problematic due to its 'async-signal-safe' restrictions before an <b>exec</b> call. It aims to combine the functionality of <b>fork()</b> and <b>execve()</b> into a single, often optimized, system call.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>spd-conf</b> [<b>-e</b>|<b>-d</b>] [<b>-t</b>] [<b>-s</b>] [<b>-u</b> <I>USER</I>] [<b>-h</b>] <I>ARGUMENT</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-e</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables support for the specified client application or speech module. This is typically followed by the name of the client or module.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables support for the specified client application or speech module. This is also followed by the name of the client or module.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates test mode. In this mode, <i><b>spd-conf</b></i> will simulate the configuration changes without actually writing anything to the disk. Useful for dry runs.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables silent mode. No output will be printed to the console during execution, useful for scripting or automated tasks.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <I>USER</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a different user for whom the configuration should be applied, instead of the current user. This is particularly useful for system-wide configurations or managing other user accounts.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and usage instructions for the <i><b>spd-conf</b></i> command.<br><br><b><I>ARGUMENT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the client application (e.g., 'firefox', 'orca') or the speech module (e.g., 'espeak', 'rhvoice', 'festival') to be enabled or disabled. This argument is mandatory when using <b>-e</b> or <b>-d</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>spd-conf</b></i> is a utility script designed to simplify the configuration of the Speech Dispatcher system. Speech Dispatcher is an interface that provides a common API for various speech synthesis (text-to-speech) systems, allowing applications to speak without needing to directly interact with different synthesizers. <br><br>The primary function of <i><b>spd-conf</b></i> is to enable or disable support for specific client applications (e.g., screen readers like Orca, or browsers like Firefox with accessibility features) and speech synthesis modules (e.g., eSpeak, RHVoice, Festival) within the Speech Dispatcher framework. It automates the modification of relevant configuration files, which are typically located in the user's home directory (e.g., <I>~/.config/speech-dispatcher/</I>) or system-wide (e.g., <I>/etc/speech-dispatcher/</I>). This tool helps users and administrators manage which applications can utilize Speech Dispatcher and which speech engines are available and active, streamlining the setup and customization process for accessibility and vocal feedback.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>spd-conf</b></i> requires the Speech Dispatcher service to be installed and running to be effective. It primarily modifies user-specific configuration files (e.g., in <i>~/.config/speech-dispatcher/</i>). For system-wide changes or modifications for other users (using <b>-u</b>), appropriate permissions (e.g., <I>sudo</I>) may be required. Incorrect use of arguments or attempting to configure non-existent clients/modules may not always result in clear error messages. Always verify configuration changes after running the command.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES MODIFIED
content:
When <i><b>spd-conf</b></i> is executed, it modifies configuration files that dictate how Speech Dispatcher behaves. For individual users, these files are typically found in <i><B>~/.config/speech-dispatcher/</B></i>. For system-wide settings, the relevant files reside in <i><B>/etc/speech-dispatcher/</B></i>. These include settings for enabled modules, client access, and other Speech Dispatcher preferences. The tool intelligently determines which files to adjust based on the specified user or system context.


title: ENABLING/DISABLING SUPPORT
content:
The core functionality of <i><b>spd-conf</b></i> lies in toggling support. When you enable a client (e.g., with <B>spd-conf -e firefox</B>), it ensures that Firefox can communicate with and use the Speech Dispatcher service for text-to-speech output. When disabling a module (e.g., with <B>spd-conf -d espeak</B>), it instructs Speech Dispatcher to no longer use eSpeak as a available speech synthesizer, which can be useful for troubleshooting or managing resources.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>spd-conf</b></i> is a component of the broader Speech Dispatcher project, which began development in the early 2000s to provide a standard abstraction layer for speech synthesis. As the project matured, utilities like <i><b>spd-conf</b></i> were introduced to simplify the often complex task of configuring different speech synthesizers and client applications. Its development has focused on making the Speech Dispatcher framework more user-friendly and accessible, reducing the need for manual editing of configuration files.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>TEXT...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The text string(s) to be spoken aloud. If multiple strings are provided, they are concatenated with spaces.<br><br><b><b>-w</b>, <b>--wait</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Wait for the speech to finish before the command exits.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>FILE</i>, <b>--output-file</b>=<i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Save the spoken output to a WAV file instead of playing it through the audio device.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>RATE</i>, <b>--rate</b>=<i>RATE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the speech rate. Value typically ranges from -100 to 100, where 0 is the default.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>PITCH</i>, <b>--pitch</b>=<i>PITCH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the speech pitch. Value typically ranges from -100 to 100, where 0 is the default.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> <i>VOLUME</i>, <b>--volume</b>=<i>VOLUME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the speech volume. Value typically ranges from -100 to 100, where 0 is the default.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>LANG</i>, <b>--language</b>=<i>LANG</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the language for speech synthesis (e.g., 'en', 'es', 'fr').<br><br><b><b>-g</b> <i>GENDER</i>, <b>--gender</b>=<i>GENDER</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the preferred gender for the voice (e.g., 'male', 'female', 'neutral').<br><br><b><b>--voice</b>=<i>VOICE_NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a particular voice name to use (e.g., 'en_US-male-basic'). Use <b>--list-voices</b> to see available voices.<br><br><b><b>--list-voices</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all available voices configured in Speech Dispatcher.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>spd-say</i> is a command-line utility for converting text into speech using the Speech Dispatcher framework. It acts as a client to the Speech Dispatcher daemon, allowing users to easily read out loud any text provided as an argument or from standard input.<br><br>This command provides a unified interface to various underlying speech synthesizers installed on the system, such as eSpeak NG or Festival. It's particularly useful for quick audio feedback, accessibility scripts, or integrating text-to-speech capabilities into shell scripts. Its simplicity makes it a popular choice for basic text-to-speech needs on Linux.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>spd-say</b> command relies on the <i>Speech Dispatcher</i> daemon (<b>speechd</b>) being active and running in the background. If the daemon is not running, the command will likely fail or produce no output.<br><br>The quality and availability of voices and languages depend entirely on the underlying speech synthesizers installed and configured with Speech Dispatcher (e.g., eSpeak NG, Festival, etc.). Users might need to install additional speech synthesizer packages for specific languages or higher quality output.


title: UNDERLYING SYNTHESIZERS
content:
<b>spd-say</b> itself does not perform speech synthesis. Instead, it sends text to the <i>Speech Dispatcher</i> daemon, which then forwards it to one of the installed speech synthesizers (like eSpeak NG, Festival, etc.) that are configured as modules.<br>The quality and characteristics of the voice you hear are determined by these backend synthesizers.


title: SPEECH DISPATCHER DAEMON (SPEECHD)
content:
For <b>spd-say</b> to function, the <i>Speech Dispatcher</i> daemon (<b>speechd</b>) must be running. This daemon manages speech requests, handles different clients, and communicates with the actual speech synthesis engines.<br>In many modern Linux distributions, it starts automatically as a system service or user service.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>spd-say</b> is an integral part of the <i>Speech Dispatcher</i> project, which was initiated to provide a high-level, unified interface for speech synthesis on Unix-like operating systems. Developed by Peter Vágner and others, Speech Dispatcher aims to abstract away the complexities and differences between various speech synthesizers.<br><br><b>spd-say</b> emerged as the primary command-line client for this system, allowing users to easily interact with the speech services without needing to know the specifics of the backend synthesizer. Its development is ongoing, focusing on broader compatibility and improved accessibility.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-D</b>, <b>--device</b>=<I>NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the ALSA sound device to use (e.g., 'hw:0,0' or 'default').<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--channels</b>=<I>CHANNELS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of audio channels for the stream (e.g., 2 for stereo, 6 for 5.1 surround).<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--rate</b>=<I>RATE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the sample rate in Hertz (Hz) for the audio stream (e.g., 44100, 48000).<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--format</b>=<I>FORMAT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the sample format (e.g., S16_LE for 16-bit signed little-endian, U8 for 8-bit unsigned).<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--test</b>=<I>TYPE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Determines the type of audio test: 'sine' (default sine wave), 'pink' (pink noise), or 'wav' (custom WAV file).<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--nloops</b>=<I>LOOPS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies how many times to loop through all speaker channels. A value of 0 means loop endlessly.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--speaker</b>=<I>SPEAKER</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>(Deprecated)</b> Tests a specific speaker channel by its number (1 to N). For looping through all, use <b>-l</b>.<br><br><b><b>-F</b>, <b>--file</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the path to a WAV file to be used when the test type is 'wav' (<b>-t wav</b>).<br><br><b><b>-S</b>, <b>--sine-freq</b>=<I>FREQ</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the frequency in Hz for the sine wave test (default is 440 Hz).<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, displaying more detailed information about the test process.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the command's help message and available options.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the speaker-test utility.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>speaker-test</code> is a command-line utility from the <I>ALSA utilities</I> package, designed to assist users in verifying the correct setup and functionality of their multi-channel audio systems. It generates audio tones, such as sine waves or pink noise, and plays them sequentially through each configured speaker channel. This helps users identify if their speakers are correctly wired and if the operating system's channel mapping (e.g., front-left, front-right, center, surround) matches their physical speaker arrangement.<br><br>The tool supports various audio parameters, including sample rate, number of channels, and audio format, allowing for flexible testing across different hardware configurations. It's particularly useful for diagnosing issues in surround sound setups or simply ensuring that all connected speakers are producing sound as expected. It operates directly with ALSA, providing a low-level audio test without relying on higher-level sound servers like PulseAudio or PipeWire, though it can work through their ALSA compatibility layers.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <I>ALSA sound system</I> to be properly configured and functional on your Linux machine. While it can operate through ALSA compatibility layers provided by higher-level sound servers like PulseAudio or PipeWire, direct ALSA access might be necessary for some configurations. Be mindful of your speaker volume before starting the test, as the generated tones can be loud, especially with higher frequencies or longer durations.


title: COMMON USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
Here are a few common scenarios for using <code>speaker-test</code>:<br><br><b>Stereo Test (one loop):</b><br><code>speaker-test</code> <b>-c</b> 2 <b>-l</b> 1<br><I>(Plays sine wave through left, then right speaker once)</I><br><br><b>5.1 Surround Sound Test (Continuous):</b><br><code>speaker-test</code> <b>-c</b> 6 <b>-l</b> 0<br><I>(Cycles through all 6 channels continuously until interrupted with Ctrl+C)</I><br><br><b>Specific Speaker Test (Front-Left, 440Hz, for stereo):</b><br><code>speaker-test</code> <b>-c</b> 2 <b>-s</b> 1<br><I>(Plays tone on the first channel only for a stereo setup; note: <b>-s</b> is deprecated)</I><br><br><b>Test with Pink Noise for Stereo:</b><br><code>speaker-test</code> <b>-c</b> 2 <b>-t</b> pink<br><I>(Plays pink noise through left, then right channel continuously)</I><br><br><b>Test with Custom WAV File:</b><br><code>speaker-test</code> <b>-t</b> wav <b>-F</b> /path/to/my_test_sound.wav<br><I>(Plays a specified WAV file once per channel, cycling through configured channels)</I>


title: INTERACTION WITH SOUND SERVERS
content:
While <code>speaker-test</code> interacts directly with ALSA, modern Linux distributions often use higher-level sound servers like PulseAudio or PipeWire. These servers typically provide an ALSA compatibility layer, allowing <code>speaker-test</code> to function without explicit configuration. However, if you encounter issues, ensure that your sound server is running and that its ALSA plugin or module is enabled. You can also specify an ALSA device that directly bypasses the sound server, e.g., <b>-D</b> hw:0,0, if you know your sound card's device ID, though this is less common for general testing.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>speaker-test</code> is an integral part of the <I>ALSA Utilities</I> (alsa-utils) project, which provides essential command-line tools for managing the Advanced Linux Sound Architecture (ALSA). ALSA itself was developed as a replacement for the older OSS (Open Sound System) and has been the default low-level audio system in Linux for many years. <code>speaker-test</code> was created to offer a simple, direct method for hardware-level audio output verification, crucial for sound card manufacturers and end-users setting up multi-channel audio.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information about Spectacle.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a concise help message with available command-line options.<br><br><b><b>--fullscreen</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Captures a screenshot of the entire desktop across all connected screens.<br><br><b><b>--activewindow</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Takes a screenshot of the currently active (focused) window.<br><br><b><b>--currentscreen</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Captures a screenshot of the screen where the Spectacle window is currently located or the primary screen if run in background mode.<br><br><b><b>--region</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates a mode allowing the user to select a specific rectangular region of the screen to capture interactively.<br><br><b><b>--rect</b> <i>&lt;x,y,w,h&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Takes a screenshot of a specific rectangular area defined by its top-left coordinates (x,y) and its width (w) and height (h) in pixels. This is a non-interactive capture.<br><br><b><b>--delay</b> <i>&lt;seconds&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a delay in seconds before the screenshot is actually taken. Useful for preparing the screen content.<br><br><b><b>--output</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Saves the captured screenshot directly to the specified file path without opening the Spectacle GUI.<br><br><b><b>--background</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs Spectacle in a background mode, taking the screenshot immediately based on other options (e.g., <b>--fullscreen</b>, <b>--activewindow</b>) and saving it to file or clipboard without showing the UI.<br><br><b><b>--nonotify</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents Spectacle from displaying a notification after a screenshot has been successfully taken.<br><br><b><b>--pointer</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes the mouse pointer in the captured screenshot.<br><br><b><b>--no-decoration</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When capturing windows (e.g., with <b>--activewindow</b>), this option excludes the window's title bar and borders from the screenshot.<br><br><b><b>--new-instance</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts a completely new instance of Spectacle, even if another instance is already running.<br><br><b><b>--minimized</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts Spectacle minimized directly to the system tray, without opening its main window.<br><br><b><b>--save-dialog</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Immediately shows the 'Save As' dialog after taking a screenshot, instead of performing a default action (like copying to clipboard or saving to a default location).<br><br><b><b>--clipboard</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Copies the captured screenshot directly to the system clipboard, making it available for pasting into other applications.<br><br><b><b>--screenshot-mode</b> <i>&lt;mode&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the screenshot capture mode. Available modes include <i>"fullscreen"</i>, <i>"active-window"</i>, <i>"current-screen"</i>, and <i>"region"</i>.<br><br><b><b>--launch-mode</b> <i>&lt;mode&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets how Spectacle is launched. Available modes include <i>"default"</i> (normal UI), <i>"interactive"</i> (allows user selection), and <i>"background"</i> (takes shot without UI).<br><br><b><b>--no-debug-log</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the output of debug information, useful for suppressing verbose logging.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Spectacle is the default screenshot utility for the <b>KDE Plasma</b> desktop environment. It allows users to easily capture various types of screenshots, including the entire desktop, active windows, specific screens, or user-defined rectangular regions. It provides options for delayed captures, inclusion of the mouse pointer, and the ability to exclude window decorations. Spectacle integrates seamlessly with the KDE environment, offering features like direct saving to file, copying to clipboard, and basic annotation tools within its graphical user interface.<br><br>While primarily a GUI application, it can be invoked from the command line with options to automate specific screenshot tasks, making it a versatile tool for both interactive and script-based use cases. Its ease of use and rich feature set make it a go-to tool for capturing visual content on KDE systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Spectacle is primarily designed for the <b>KDE Plasma</b> desktop environment. While it might be installed on other Linux distributions, its full feature set and seamless integration are best experienced within KDE. Command-line options facilitate automation, but advanced features like in-app annotation are only accessible through its graphical user interface. Users on non-KDE environments might find alternative screenshot tools more suitable or require installing significant KDE dependencies.


title: <I>CLIPBOARD AND FILE INTEGRATION</I>
content:
Spectacle offers seamless integration with the system clipboard, allowing users to copy screenshots directly without saving them to a file. It also supports saving screenshots to various common image formats like <b>PNG</b>, <b>JPEG</b>, and <b>BMP</b>, with options to specify the output directory and filename directly from its UI or via command-line options like <b>--output</b>.


title: <I>WAYLAND SUPPORT</I>
content:
A significant advancement for Spectacle was its robust support for the <b>Wayland</b> display server protocol. Unlike many older X11-centric screenshot tools, Spectacle is designed to function correctly and efficiently in modern Linux desktop environments that utilize Wayland, ensuring compatibility and performance in contemporary setups.


title: HISTORY
content:
Spectacle emerged as the successor to <i>KDE's ksnapshot</i> application, becoming the default screenshot utility for <b>KDE Plasma 5.4</b> (released in August 2015) and subsequent versions. Its development aimed to provide a more modern, intuitive interface and improved functionality, notably including better support for the <b>Wayland</b> display server and integrated annotation tools. It continues to be actively maintained as part of the <b>KDE Applications</b> suite, evolving with the Plasma desktop itself.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the output, showing more details about the checks being performed and their results.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decreases the verbosity of the output. When successful, it will produce no output, making it useful for scripting or automated checks.<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug messages, providing extensive internal information for troubleshooting or development purposes.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message, including usage instructions and a list of all available options.<br><br><b>-c <vuln>, --check <vuln></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks only a specific vulnerability or set of vulnerabilities. This option can be specified multiple times (e.g., <I>-c Meltdown -c SpectreV1</I>).<br><br><b>-n, --no-cli-colors</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the use of color in the output, which can be useful when redirecting output to a file or using terminals that do not support ANSI color codes.<br><br><b>-p, --patch-version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version of the patch or mitigation applied in the kernel for each vulnerability, if such information is available.<br><br><b>-r, --rules</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instead of performing an actual check, this option displays the rules and logic used by the checker to determine vulnerability status.<br><br><b>-x, --explain</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides detailed explanations about the vulnerabilities and their respective mitigations, making the output more informative. This option implies <I>--verbose</I>.<br><br><b>-k <version>, --kernel <version></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows checking a specific kernel version (e.g., <I>5.15.0-76-generic</I>) instead of the currently running one. The script will attempt to retrieve the corresponding kernel configuration.<br><br><b>-a, --all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks all available vulnerabilities. This is the default behavior of the command if no specific check options are provided.<br><br><b>-s <path>, --sysfs-path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses an alternative path for the <I>sysfs</I> filesystem (default is <I>/sys</I>). This is typically used in containerized environments or chroot setups.<br><br><b>-N, --no-kpti-check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the KPTI/PCID check. This option is primarily for testing purposes and should generally not be used in production.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version of the <B>spectre-meltdown-checker</B> script and then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>spectre-meltdown-checker</B> command is a comprehensive shell script designed to assess a Linux system's vulnerability status against a wide range of speculative execution side-channel attacks, including <I>Meltdown</I>, <I>Spectre</I> (v1, v2, RSB, BHI/MMIO), <I>L1TF</I>, <I>MDS</I> (Zombieload, RIDL, Fallout), <I>SRBDS</I>, <I>TAA</I>, <I>TSX Asynchronous Abort (TAA)</I>, <I>Downfall</I>, <I>Inception</I>, and others.<BR><BR>It works by inspecting the running kernel's configuration, CPU features (from <I>/proc/cpuinfo</I>), and kernel-exposed vulnerability information (typically found in <I>/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/</I>). The tool reports on the presence and status of various kernel mitigations, such as <I>KPTI/PCID</I>, <I>IBPB</I>, <I>IBRS</I>, <I>Retpolines</I>, <I>L1D_FLUSH</I>, and <I>MDS_NO</I>. It provides clear indications (often color-coded) of whether the system is vulnerable, protected, or partially protected, offering actionable advice on necessary updates or configuration changes. Running the command often requires <B>root privileges</B> to access all required system information.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <B>spectre-meltdown-checker</B> typically requires <B>root privileges</B> to access all necessary system files (e.g., <I>/proc/cpuinfo</I>, <I>/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/</I>) to provide a complete and accurate assessment. Its results are highly dependent on the kernel version and the specific CPU model, as mitigations and vulnerability exposures vary. While comprehensive, it focuses on known speculative execution vulnerabilities and their mitigations; it might not detect all theoretical attack paths or zero-day vulnerabilities. It serves as a diagnostic tool, providing information and guidance, but does not apply fixes or patches itself.


title: REQUIREMENTS
content:
The script primarily requires a modern Linux kernel (typically 4.15 or newer, as this is when the <I>/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/</I> interface was introduced) that exposes the necessary CPU and vulnerability information. It relies on standard Unix utilities like <I>bash</I>, <I>sed</I>, <I>grep</I>, <I>awk</I>, and <I>head</I>, which are typically available on most Linux distributions.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <B>spectre-meltdown-checker</B> script emerged shortly after the public disclosure of the <I>Spectre</I> and <I>Meltdown</I> vulnerabilities in early 2018. These critical CPU vulnerabilities sent ripples through the computing industry, highlighting the need for tools to quickly assess system exposure. Developed by <I>Fabian Moeller (speed47)</I>, it rapidly gained popularity as a simple yet effective way for Linux users and administrators to check their systems. Since its initial release, the script has been continuously updated to incorporate checks for newly discovered speculative execution vulnerabilities (like <I>L1TF</I>, <I>MDS</I>, <I>SRBDS</I>, <I>TAA</I>, <I>Downfall</I>, etc.) and improved kernel mitigations, reflecting the ongoing efforts to secure systems against these complex threats.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>speech-dispatcher</b> [<i>OPTIONS...</i>]<br><br>Examples:<br><i>Start daemon:</i> <b>speech-dispatcher --daemon</b><br><i>Stop daemon:</i> <b>speech-dispatcher --stop</b><br><i>Restart daemon:</i> <b>speech-dispatcher --restart</b><br><i>Reload configuration:</i> <b>speech-dispatcher --reload</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug messages for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>LOG_LEVEL</i>, <b>--log-level=</b><i>LOG_LEVEL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the logging verbosity level. <i>LOG_LEVEL</i> can range from 0 (no logs) to 5 (most verbose).<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>CONF_FILE</i>, <b>--conf-file=</b><i>CONF_FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file to use instead of the default ones.<br><br><b><b>-D</b>, <b>--daemon</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts <b>speech-dispatcher</b> as a background daemon process.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--stop</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sends a signal to stop the running <b>speech-dispatcher</b> daemon.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--restart</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restarts the running <b>speech-dispatcher</b> daemon.<br><br><b><b>-R</b>, <b>--reload</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reloads the configuration file of the running <b>speech-dispatcher</b> daemon without stopping it.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>PID_FILE</i>, <b>--pid-file=</b><i>PID_FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative PID file path for the daemon.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of <b>speech-dispatcher</b>.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available command-line options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>speech-dispatcher</b> is a server process (daemon) that provides a high-level, unified interface for applications to communicate with various speech synthesis engines. It aims to simplify the use of Text-to-Speech (TTS) functionalities by abstracting away the complexities of different backends like eSpeak, Festival, or RHVoice.<br><br>It manages speech requests from multiple client applications, queuing them and routing them to the appropriate synthesis engine. This daemon-based approach ensures consistent speech output across applications and allows users to configure their preferred voice and engine globally. While it runs as a background service, the <b>speech-dispatcher</b> command itself is primarily used for controlling the daemon (starting, stopping, reloading) or for debugging purposes. For direct speech output, client commands like <b>spd-say</b> are typically used to interact with the running daemon.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>speech-dispatcher</b> is a daemon manager; it does not directly produce speech output on its own. It requires a client application (like <b>spd-say</b> or a screen reader) to send text to it. Additionally, it depends on one or more underlying speech synthesis engines (e.g., eSpeak, Festival) to be installed and properly configured on the system to function correctly. Configuration can be complex and may require editing files in <i>/etc/speech-dispatcher/</i> or <i>~/.speechd/</i>.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The main configuration files for <b>speech-dispatcher</b> are typically located at <i>/etc/speech-dispatcher/speechd.conf</i> for system-wide settings, and <i>~/.speechd/speechd.conf</i> for user-specific overrides. These files control aspects such as the default speech engine, voice parameters, and logging.


title: CLIENT INTERACTION
content:
While <b>speech-dispatcher</b> manages the speech synthesis service, user applications interact with it through client libraries or dedicated command-line tools. The most common command-line client is <b>spd-say(1)</b>, which allows users to directly send text to the running <b>speech-dispatcher</b> daemon for speech output from the terminal.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>speech-dispatcher</b> was developed as part of the broader effort to improve accessibility on Linux desktop environments, particularly within the GNOME project. Its primary goal was to provide a standardized, high-level API for applications to interact with various Text-to-Speech (TTS) engines, abstracting away the engine-specific complexities. This allowed developers to integrate speech output into their applications without needing to know the intricacies of each individual synthesis backend. It has evolved to support a wide range of speech synthesizers and has become a crucial component for screen readers and other assistive technologies on Linux.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>--list</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a list of Speedtest.net servers sorted by proximity.<br><br><b><B>--server</B> <I>ID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a server ID from the <B>--list</B> output to test against.<br><br><b><B>--share</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generate and provide a shareable image link of your results.<br><br><b><B>--simple</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress verbose output and display only the key metrics (ping, download, upload).<br><br><b><B>--json</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output the results in JSON format, suitable for scripting and parsing.<br><br><b><B>--bytes</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display results in bytes/second instead of bits/second.<br><br><b><B>--no-pre-allocate</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable pre-allocation of the upload buffer, potentially useful for low-memory systems.<br><br><b><B>--secure</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use HTTPS for API and speedtest operations. (Default in recent versions).<br><br><b><B>--version</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the version number of the <I>speedtest-cli</I> client.<br><br><b><B>--help</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>speedtest</I> command, often referring to the widely used <I>speedtest-cli</I> (a Python-based client), allows users to measure their internet connection's download speed, upload speed, and ping (latency) directly from the command line. It interacts with the Speedtest.net service by Ookla, automatically selecting the best server based on ping, or allowing users to specify a server. This utility is invaluable for network diagnostics, verifying ISP claims, and troubleshooting connectivity issues, providing quick and reliable performance metrics without requiring a web browser. While <I>speedtest-cli</I> is a popular community-driven tool, Ookla also provides an official command-line client.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <I>speedtest-cli</I> tool relies on publicly available Ookla Speedtest servers. Results can be influenced by various factors including network congestion, server load, geographical distance to the chosen server, and local network conditions. It's important to note that <I>speedtest-cli</I> is a community-developed project and not officially maintained by Ookla. While reliable, for official diagnostic purposes, one might consider Ookla's own proprietary command-line tool if available.


title: INSTALLATION (FOR <I>SPEEDTEST-CLI</I>)
content:
The most common way to install <I>speedtest-cli</I> is via pip, the Python package installer:<br><br><code>pip install speedtest-cli</code><br><br>Alternatively, many Linux distributions provide it through their package managers (e.g., <br><code>sudo apt install speedtest-cli</code> on Debian/Ubuntu, <br><code>sudo dnf install speedtest-cli</code> on Fedora, or <br><code>sudo pacman -S speedtest-cli</code> on Arch Linux).


title: BASIC USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
Run a standard speed test:<br><code>speedtest</code><br><br>Run a simple test showing only key results:<br><code>speedtest --simple</code><br><br>List available servers and then test against a specific one (e.g., ID 12345):<br><code>speedtest --list</code><br><code>speedtest --server 12345</code><br><br>Get results in JSON format:<br><code>speedtest --json</code>


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of an internet speed test from the command line gained significant traction with the development of <I>speedtest-cli</I>. This open-source, Python-based client emerged as a popular alternative to web-based speed testing, allowing users to interact with Ookla's Speedtest.net service directly from their terminals. Its widespread adoption solidified its place as the de-facto 'speedtest' command for many Linux users. While initially unofficial, its success eventually led Ookla to develop and release its own official command-line client, providing an additional option for users seeking command-line network performance measurements.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i><b>speed.1s</b></i><br>This command is not a standard Linux utility, and therefore, no general synopsis can be provided. Execution will likely result in a 'command not found' error.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <i><b>speed.1s</b></i> does not appear to be a standard or commonly recognized Linux command or utility available in typical distributions. It is highly probable that this is a typo, an alias specific to a particular user's shell configuration, a custom script, or a non-standard third-party tool not widely adopted. Standard Linux systems do not include a command explicitly named <i><b>speed.1s</b></i> by default. When executed, it will typically result in a 'command not found' error message. Users seeking information on performance measurement or network/disk speeds should verify the exact command they are interested in, such as <i><b>iperf</b></i> for network throughput, <i><b>hdparm</b></i> for disk performance, or <i><b>speedtest-cli</b></i> for internet connection speed. Without further context or clarification, specific details regarding its syntax, parameters, or behavior cannot be provided.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <i><b>speed.1s</b></i> is not included in standard Linux distributions. Attempting to execute it will typically result in a 'command not found' error. Its behavior, if any, is entirely dependent on whether it's an alias, a custom script, or a specific program installed outside the standard repositories within a particular environment.


title: COMMON MISINTERPRETATION
content:
Users often encounter 'command not found' errors for <i><b>speed.1s</b></i>. If you intended to delay execution for one second, the correct command is <i><b>sleep 1s</b></i>. If you meant to measure network speed, common tools include <i><b>iperf</b></i> or <i><b>speedtest-cli</b></i>. For disk I/O performance, <i><b>hdparm</b></i> or <i><b>dd</b></i> are frequently used utilities.


title: HISTORY
content:
No specific development or usage history exists for <i><b>speed.1s</b></i> as it is not a recognized standard Linux command. Its appearance in any context would likely be due to custom scripting or aliases rather than a formal utility development.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message describing command usage and exit.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information for SpeedCrunch and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>SpeedCrunch</b> is a free, open-source, and high-precision graphical desktop calculator designed for powerful mathematical computations. It offers an intuitive, user-friendly interface combined with advanced features making it suitable for scientists, engineers, and students alike. Users can perform complex calculations with arbitrary precision, supporting a vast array of scientific functions including trigonometric, logarithmic, and hyperbolic operations. It boasts a comprehensive built-in constant library, unit conversions, variable storage, and an expression history. Its interactive nature provides syntax highlighting, auto-completion, and live results as you type, enhancing the user experience for efficient problem-solving.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>SpeedCrunch</b> is primarily a graphical user interface (GUI) application. While it can be launched from the command line, it does not support evaluating expressions directly from the terminal or scripting in a non-interactive mode, unlike tools such as <b>bc</b> or <b>awk</b>. Its primary use case is as an interactive desktop calculator.


title: INTERACTIVE FEATURES AND PRECISION
content:
<b>SpeedCrunch</b> excels in its interactive design, offering real-time results, syntax highlighting, and auto-completion as you type. This significantly enhances the user experience for complex calculations.<br>A key differentiator is its arbitrary-precision arithmetic, allowing for calculations with an extremely high number of decimal places, crucial for scientific and engineering tasks. It also features extensive unit conversion capabilities and a customizable constant library, further streamlining advanced computations.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>SpeedCrunch</b> was originally developed by Johan Lindkvist. It has been maintained by a community of developers over the years, evolving into a robust, cross-platform calculator available for Linux, Windows, and macOS. Its development has consistently focused on providing high precision, a rich feature set, and an intuitive user experience, making it a popular choice for technical and scientific users requiring more than basic calculator functionalities.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>DEVICE</i> | <i>FILE</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies network interfaces (e.g., eth0, wlan0) or file paths to monitor. If omitted, <i>speedometer</i> typically attempts to monitor all active network interfaces.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitor read (download) speed only.<br><br><b><b>-w</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitor write (upload) speed only.<br><br><b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show cumulative data transfer (total bytes/bits transferred) instead of real-time speed.<br><br><b><b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Interpret arguments as file paths to monitor, rather than network interfaces.<br><br><b><b>--bytes</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display speeds in bytes per second (B/s, KB/s, MB/s). This is the default unit.<br><br><b><b>--bits</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display speeds in bits per second (b/s, Kb/s, Mb/s).<br><br><b><b>--no-graph</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not display the ASCII art graph; show only text statistics.<br><br><b><b>--interval</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the update interval in seconds to <i>N</i> (default is 1 second).<br><br><b><b>--clear</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Clear the screen before each update, providing a clean display.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>speedometer</i> is a command-line utility designed to monitor and visualize real-time data transfer speeds. It provides a dynamic, ASCII-art based "speedometer" gauge and graph, displaying both read and write operations for specified network interfaces or files. Users can track current and average transfer rates, making it an excellent tool for diagnosing network bottlenecks, monitoring large file transfers, or simply observing system I/O activity. It supports various units (bytes, bits) and offers options for cumulative data display, making it a simple yet powerful utility for quick performance insights directly from the terminal.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>speedometer</i> typically requires root privileges to monitor all network interfaces or certain raw disk I/O activities. Its ASCII-art output is best suited for quick, real-time visual inspection rather than detailed data logging or complex analysis. Accuracy can sometimes vary under heavy system load or for very short monitoring durations. It's a simple tool primarily for interactive use, not for scripting or comprehensive performance monitoring suites.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<i>speedometer</i> is often available in the default repositories of most Linux distributions.<br>For Debian/Ubuntu-based systems:<br><b>sudo apt install speedometer</b><br>For Fedora/CentOS/RHEL-based systems:<br><b>sudo dnf install speedometer</b>


title: BASIC USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
To monitor overall network speed (read/write) of all active interfaces:<br><b>speedometer</b><br><br>To monitor download speed only on 'eth0':<br><b>speedometer -r eth0</b><br><br>To monitor the write speed of a file being copied:<br><b>speedometer -w -f /path/to/your/largefile</b><br><br>To see cumulative bytes transferred on 'wlan0':<br><b>speedometer -c wlan0</b><br><br>To monitor multiple devices with a 0.5-second interval:<br><b>speedometer --interval 0.5 eth0 wlan0</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>speedometer</i> was developed as a minimalist, terminal-based tool to provide instant visual feedback on network or disk transfer rates. Its strength lies in its simplicity and ability to present real-time data using ASCII art, making it accessible on any terminal. While not as feature-rich as some other monitoring tools, its focus on immediate, easy-to-understand metrics has ensured its continued use for quick diagnostics and monitoring.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-w <WPM></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the reading speed in words per minute (WPM).<br><br><b>--wpm <WPM></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the reading speed in words per minute (WPM).<br><br><b>-d <DELAY_MS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the delay between words in milliseconds, alternative to WPM.<br><br><b>--delay <DELAY_MS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the delay between words in milliseconds, alternative to WPM.<br><br><b>-f <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input text file to read.<br><br><b>--file <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input text file to read.<br><br><b>-l <LINES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Limits the number of lines to process from the input.<br><br><b>--lines <LINES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Limits the number of lines to process from the input.<br><br><b>-c <CHARS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum number of characters to display per chunk/word.<br><br><b>--chars <CHARS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum number of characters to display per chunk/word.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the reader in a paused state, requiring user input to begin.<br><br><b>--pause</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the reader in a paused state, requiring user input to begin.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>speedread</I> is a utility designed to help users increase their reading speed by presenting text using the <b>Rapid Serial Visual Presentation (RSVP)</b> method. Instead of moving your eyes across a line of text, RSVP displays single words or short phrases at a time in a fixed position, at a user-controlled pace. This technique aims to reduce saccadic eye movements and encourage central fixation, thereby improving focus and reading efficiency. The command typically takes a plain text file or standard input as its source and displays its content word by word, allowing the user to dynamically adjust the display rate, usually measured in words-per-minute (WPM). It serves as a tool for practicing speed reading, often implemented as a lightweight script or program.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>speedread</I> is not a standard GNU or core Linux utility; its availability depends on specific distributions or whether it's installed from third-party sources or created as a custom script.<br>Implementations can vary significantly in features, syntax, and robustness.<br>Effectiveness for improving reading speed is subjective and varies per individual.<br>May not handle complex text formatting (e.g., bold, italics, tables) well, often stripping them to plain text.


title: INTERACTIVE CONTROLS
content:
Many <I>speedread</I> implementations offer interactive controls during reading, such as pressing `spacebar` to pause/unpause, `+`/`-` keys to adjust speed on the fly, or arrow keys to navigate forward/backward through text.


title: TEXT PREPROCESSING
content:
Some versions might include basic text preprocessing features like stripping punctuation, normalizing capitalization, or handling common abbreviations to improve readability and focus during RSVP.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of <b>Rapid Serial Visual Presentation (RSVP)</b> dates back to the 1970s as a method for displaying text quickly, often used in research for reading and cognitive psychology. The <I>speedread</I> command in Linux is typically a modern implementation of this concept, often developed by individual programmers or communities as open-source projects (e.g., Python scripts, C programs). There isn't a single, long-standing 'official' <I>speedread</I> command analogous to <I>ls</I> or <I>grep</I>. Its usage has grown with interest in speed reading techniques and the availability of scripting languages like Python for easy development.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits the program.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the program's version number and exits.<br><br><b><b>-L</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all available Ookla Speedtest servers by ID and location.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <I>SERVER_ID</I>, <b>--server</b> <I>SERVER_ID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a particular server ID to run the test against. Use <b>--list</b> to find IDs.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <I>FORMAT</I>, <b>--output-format</b> <I>FORMAT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output format. Common formats include <b>human</b> (default), <b>json</b>, <b>json-pretty</b>, <b>csv</b>, and <b>tsv</b>.<br><br><b><b>--share</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates and displays a shareable image URL of the test results.<br><br><b><b>--accept-gdpr</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically accepts the GDPR agreement required for using the service, useful for scripting.<br><br><b><b>--accept-license</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically accepts the Ookla license agreement, necessary for non-interactive use.<br><br><b><b>--unit</b> <I>UNIT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the unit of speed for results. Options are <b>bit</b> (for Mbps, default) or <b>byte</b> (for MBps).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>speedtest</i> is a robust command-line interface tool designed for comprehensive measurement of internet connection performance. It accurately assesses key network metrics including download speed, upload speed, and latency (ping time) by establishing connections to the nearest or user-specified Ookla Speedtest servers globally. This utility proves invaluable for a variety of use cases, from diagnosing intermittent network issues and verifying Internet Service Provider (ISP) advertised speeds to proactively monitoring network stability and performance trends over time. By providing a quick, reliable, and standardized method to gauge bandwidth and responsiveness directly from the terminal, it serves as an essential diagnostic and monitoring tool for system administrators, developers, and everyday users alike.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>speedtest</b> requires an active internet connection to perform tests. The accuracy of results can be influenced by local network conditions, background traffic, server load, and geographical distance to the chosen server. For first-time use, or after updates, users may need to explicitly accept Ookla's GDPR and license agreements using <b>--accept-gdpr</b> and <b>--accept-license</b> options.


title: OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
The <b>speedtest</b> command offers versatile output options beyond the default human-readable format. Users can specify <b>--output-format json</b>, <b>--output-format csv</b>, or <b>--output-format tsv</b> to integrate results into scripts or data analysis tools. The <b>--output-file</b> option allows saving results directly to a specified file path.


title: SERVER SELECTION
content:
While <b>speedtest</b> automatically selects an optimal server based on latency, users can explicitly choose a server using the <b>--server</b> option after listing available servers with <b>--list</b>. This is useful for testing connectivity to specific geographical locations or verifying network routes.


title: PRIVACY AND LICENSING
content:
To comply with legal requirements, the Ookla <b>speedtest</b> CLI requires users to accept their GDPR agreement and license terms. This can be done interactively on first run, or non-interactively in scripts using the <b>--accept-gdpr</b> and <b>--accept-license</b> flags to ensure smooth automated operation.


title: HISTORY
content:
The original Ookla Speedtest service began as a popular web-based application, providing a widely accessible method for measuring internet speeds. Recognizing the need for automated and scriptable testing, Ookla developed and released the official <b>speedtest</b> command-line interface (CLI) client. This CLI tool allows users to perform tests directly from the terminal, making it ideal for server environments, scripting, and integration into monitoring systems, thereby extending the reach and utility of the Speedtest platform beyond web browsers.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>speedtest-cli</i> [<I>options</I>]<br><i>speedtest-cli</i> <I>--list</I><br><i>speedtest-cli</i> <I>--server</I> <I>SERVER_ID</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all available Speedtest.net servers sorted by distance.<br><br><b>--server <I>SERVER_ID</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a particular server ID to test against. Use <i>--list</i> to find server IDs.<br><br><b>--share</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generate and provide a URL to the official Speedtest.net share results image.<br><br><b>--simple</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress verbose output and display only basic download, upload, and ping information.<br><br><b>--json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output results in JSON format, suitable for scripting and parsing.<br><br><b>--csv</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output results in CSV format, useful for spreadsheet applications or data analysis.<br><br><b>--bytes</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display speeds in Bytes/second instead of the default Bits/second.<br><br><b>--no-pre-allocate</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable pre-allocation of upload test data. Can be useful on systems with limited memory.<br><br><b>--secure</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use HTTPS instead of HTTP for communication with Speedtest.net servers.<br><br><b>--source <I>IP_ADDRESS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Bind to a specific IP address when making network connections.<br><br><b>--timeout <I>SECONDS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a timeout for connection attempts (default is 10 seconds).<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's version number and exit.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>speedtest-cli</i> is a powerful command-line interface for testing internet bandwidth using Speedtest.net. It enables users to conveniently measure their internet connection's download speed, upload speed, and latency (ping) directly from the terminal, eliminating the need for a web browser. This tool is exceptionally valuable for server administrators, network engineers, and anyone requiring quick network performance checks on headless systems or for automation scripts.<br><br>It intelligently automates the process of identifying the optimal nearest Speedtest server, executing the tests, and presenting the results. The output can be formatted in various user-friendly ways, including standard human-readable text, JSON, CSV, or even generate a shareable image link of the results. This versatility makes <i>speedtest-cli</i> ideal for integration into scripts, monitoring systems, or for simple, on-demand performance assessments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Results from <i>speedtest-cli</i> might slightly vary from browser-based Speedtest.net tests due to differences in testing methodologies, network conditions, or server selection. The accuracy is highly dependent on the chosen server's proximity and current load; using <i>--list</i> and <i>--server</i> can help optimize this. Note that <i>speedtest-cli</i> is a third-party client and not officially supported by Speedtest.net (Ookla), meaning its functionality is dependent on the stability of the public Speedtest.net API and could be affected by changes.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<i>speedtest-cli</i> can typically be installed using Python's <b>pip</b> package installer (<code>pip install speedtest-cli</code>) or through distribution-specific package managers (e.g., <code>sudo apt install speedtest-cli</code> on Debian/Ubuntu, <code>sudo dnf install speedtest-cli</code> on Fedora/RHEL).


title: SERVER SELECTION STRATEGY
content:
By default, <i>speedtest-cli</i> intelligently identifies the nearest and fastest server based on ping response times. However, users have the flexibility to manually specify a desired server ID using the <i>--server</i> option, which is particularly useful for testing against specific geographical locations or known high-performance servers.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>speedtest-cli</i> was initiated by Matt Martz in 2013, driven by the need for a simple, scriptable method to test internet speeds directly from the command line, bypassing the traditional web browser requirement. Its introduction filled a significant gap for system administrators and automation tasks on headless servers. The project quickly gained widespread adoption in the Linux and system administration communities due to its straightforward usage and adaptability. As an open-source project, it has benefited from continuous community development, enhancing its accuracy, adding features like JSON/CSV output, and ensuring ongoing compatibility with the evolving Speedtest.net infrastructure. Its core focus has consistently been on providing a lightweight and reliable alternative to web-based speed tests.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists available Speedtest.net servers along with their unique IDs and approximate locations. This helps in selecting a specific server for testing.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--server</b> <i>&lt;ID&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a particular server to use for the speed test by its numerical <i>ID</i>. Obtain IDs using the <b>--list</b> option.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--precision</b> <i>&lt;INT&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of decimal places for speed results, defaulting to <i>2</i>. For example, <i>-p 4</i> for higher precision.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--units</b> <i>&lt;UNIT&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the units for speed results. Accepts values like <i>bits</i>, <i>bytes</i>, <i>kbps</i>, <i>mbps</i>, <i>gbps</i>, or <i>auto</i> (default).<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--format</b> <i>&lt;FORMAT&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output format of the results. Options include <i>human</i> (default for readability), <i>json</i> (for programmatic parsing), and <i>csv</i> (for spreadsheet integration).<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--no-download</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips the download speed test, performing only ping and upload tests. Useful for targeted testing.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--no-upload</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips the upload speed test, performing only ping and download tests. Useful for targeted testing.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the testing process, including server selection and progress.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options and usage information for <b>speedtest-rs</b>.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the current version number of <b>speedtest-rs</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>speedtest-rs</b> is a lightweight, Rust-based command-line utility for testing internet connection speed. It leverages the Speedtest.net infrastructure to accurately measure download speed, upload speed, and ping latency. Designed for simplicity and efficiency, it provides clear, concise results directly in the terminal, making it an excellent tool for network diagnostics, automation, or performance monitoring without relying on a web browser. It offers various customization options including server selection, output format (human-readable, JSON, CSV), and result precision. This tool serves as a modern, efficient, and often faster alternative to other command-line speed test clients.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>speedtest-rs</b> relies on external Speedtest.net servers, meaning results can be influenced by factors such as server load, network congestion outside your local network, and geographic distance to the chosen server. It is an unofficial client, so its behavior and accuracy might occasionally differ from the official Speedtest.net website or applications. For consistent and reliable results, it's recommended to select a nearby and less congested server using the <b>--list</b> and <b>--server</b> options.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<b>speedtest-rs</b> can typically be installed via Cargo (Rust's package manager) using the command <i>cargo install speedtest-rs</i>. It might also be available in specific Linux distribution repositories or as pre-compiled binaries.


title: USAGE SCENARIOS
content:
Beyond simple one-off speed checks, <b>speedtest-rs</b> is highly valuable for scripting network monitoring, verifying Internet Service Provider (ISP) performance agreements, and diagnosing network slowdowns over time. Its <b>--format json</b> or <b>--format csv</b> options are particularly useful for programmatic parsing and integration into larger monitoring systems or data analysis tools.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>speedtest-rs</b> emerged as a modern, Rust-based command-line client for Speedtest.net, providing an efficient alternative to existing solutions like the Python-based <i>speedtest-cli</i>. Its development leveraged Rust's strengths in performance, concurrency, and memory safety, aiming for a lightweight and robust tool. It quickly gained popularity among developers and system administrators seeking a native and fast way to test internet speeds directly from their terminals, integrating well into scripts and automated workflows.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>spell</b> [<b>-b</b>] [<b>-v</b>] [<b>-x</b>] [<b>-d</b> <i>hlist</i>] [<b>-s</b> <i>hstop</i>] [<b>-h</b> <i>hsuf</i>] [<b>-i</b>] [<b>-l</b>] [<b>+</b><i>additions</i>] [<i>file ...</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-b</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks for British spelling variations instead of American English.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints all words not found in the dictionary, and also words that are 'close' to a dictionary word (e.g., derived forms).<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints every plausible stem for each word, showing how <b>spell</b>'s algorithms might interpret word structures.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>hlist</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative dictionary (history list) file to use for spell checking.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>hstop</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative stop list (words to ignore, even if they're not in the main dictionary).<br><br><b><b>-h</b> <i>hsuf</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative suffix list, used for recognizing word variations.<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores <i>troff</i>/<i>nroff</i> constructs and directives within the input text, treating them as formatting and not part of the words to be checked.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Follows symbolic links in the input files (behavior may vary across implementations).<br><br><b><b>+</b><i>additions</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a file containing a list of words, one per line, to be temporarily added to the dictionary for the current run. These words will not be flagged as misspelled.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>spell</b> command is a traditional Unix utility designed to identify potential spelling mistakes in text. It reads input from standard input or specified files, processes each word, and outputs a list of words not found in its internal dictionary to standard output. Unlike more modern spell checkers, <b>spell</b> does not offer suggestions for corrections, nor does it provide interactive features. Its primary function is a simple dictionary lookup. It's often utilized in shell scripts or command pipelines due to its non-interactive nature and ability to filter out correctly spelled words. <br><br>Historically, <b>spell</b> implementations have often leveraged other standard Unix tools like <b>sort</b> and <b>comm</b> to achieve its functionality, demonstrating the powerful Unix philosophy of combining small, specialized programs. While largely superseded by tools like <b>aspell</b> or <b>ispell</b> for interactive or more sophisticated tasks, <b>spell</b> remains a foundational tool for quick, automated dictionary checks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>spell</b> is a basic spell checker. It does not offer interactive correction, context-aware checking, or grammatical analysis. Its dictionary might be outdated or limited depending on the system configuration. Performance can be slower for very large inputs compared to modern, optimized tools, as it often relies on external commands like <b>sort</b> and <b>comm</b>.


title: UNIX PHILOSOPHY EMBODIMENT
content:
<b>spell</b> is frequently cited as a prime example of the Unix philosophy: 'Write programs that do one thing and do it well. Write programs to work together. Write programs to handle text streams, because that is a universal interface.' Its common implementation as a shell script orchestrating tools like <b>sort</b> and <b>comm</b> perfectly illustrates this principle.


title: WORD DEFINITION
content:
By default, <b>spell</b> typically defines a 'word' as a sequence of alphabetic characters (and sometimes apostrophes or hyphens) separated by non-alphabetic characters. It generally ignores numbers, punctuation, and whitespace unless specific options or dictionary rules modify this behavior.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>spell</b> command is one of the oldest Unix utilities, originating from Bell Labs in the early 1970s. It was initially developed by Stephen C. Johnson and was a part of Version 6 Unix. Its design was innovative for its time, employing hashing techniques for efficient dictionary lookups. Later Unix and Linux implementations often re-engineered <b>spell</b> as a shell script that pipelines several standard commands (like <b>tr</b>, <b>sort</b>, <b>uniq</b>, and <b>comm</b>) to compare input words against a master dictionary. This modular approach exemplifies the Unix philosophy of building powerful tools by combining simpler, specialized ones. While its core function remains consistent, its internal implementation has varied significantly across different operating systems over the decades, leading to some differences in options and behavior.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
Given its non-standard nature, a typical <B>spellcast</B> command would follow a general script or program invocation pattern:<br><br><B>spellcast</B> [<I>options</I>] [<I>spell_name</I>] [<I>target_arguments</I>]<br><br>For example: <B>spellcast</B> <I>firewall_rules</I> --<I>enable</I> <br>or <B>spellcast</B> <I>cleanse</I> /<I>tmp</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>spell_name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific operation or 'spell' to be executed (e.g., 'deploy', 'backup', 'optimize'). This would be a required argument for most custom implementations.<br><br><b><I>target_arguments</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Additional arguments specifying the target or scope of the 'spell' (e.g., a file path, a process ID, a configuration setting).<br><br><b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hypothetical option to force the execution of the spell, bypassing confirmations or warnings.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hypothetical option to enable verbose output, showing detailed steps of the spell execution.<br><br><b>-n, --dry-run</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hypothetical option to simulate the spell execution without making actual changes, useful for testing.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Hypothetical option to display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>spellcast</B> command is <B>not a standard, pre-installed Linux utility</B> found in common distributions or core system tools. It is highly probable that <B>spellcast</B> refers to a <I>custom shell script</I>, a <I>function within a specific application</I>, or a conceptual term used to describe the invocation of a complex, automated sequence of commands. <br><br> If implemented as a custom script, its purpose would typically be to encapsulate and execute a series of intricate operations or configurations, much like casting a 'spell' to achieve a desired outcome on the system. Such a command could be designed for rapid deployment, system diagnostics, invoking specific application routines, or automating tasks that are too complex for a single command. Users encountering <B>spellcast</B> should assume it is context-specific and not a universally available utility. Its functionality would be entirely dependent on its creator's design.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>The <I>spellcast</I> command is not a standard or universally available Linux utility.</B> Its existence and functionality are entirely dependent on a specific system's custom configuration or a user's bespoke environment. Do not expect <B>spellcast</B> to be present on a default Linux installation, and its behavior will vary wildly if it does exist. Always inspect the source code or thorough documentation of a <B>spellcast</B> implementation before execution to understand its exact actions and potential impact on your system.


title: CONCEPTUAL USAGE
content:
The term 'spellcast' often evokes a sense of magical or powerful action. In a computing context, this translates to executing complex, high-impact operations or scripts that dramatically alter system state, perform significant automation, or orchestrate multiple underlying commands to achieve a specific, often intricate, outcome.


title: IMPLEMENTATION VARIETIES
content:
A custom 'spellcast' command could be implemented in various ways: as a simple shell script (Bash, Zsh), a more complex script in languages like Python or Perl, a compiled binary program, or even a lightweight shell function or alias. Its capabilities and complexity would directly reflect its chosen implementation language and the intricacy of its design.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no significant development or usage history for a widely recognized <B>spellcast</B> command in the Linux ecosystem, as it is not a standard utility. Any existing instances of <B>spellcast</B> are likely bespoke creations by individual developers, specific projects, or organizations for particular internal purposes. This makes a general, centralized history impossible to document; its 'history' is fragmented into countless individual custom implementations.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<B>Custom Shell Scripts:</B> Any <I>.sh</I> or other executable script that automates tasks (e.g., <I>myscript.sh</I>), <B>Shell Functions/Aliases:</B> Built-in shell features that bundle complex commands under a simpler name (e.g., <I>alias mycommand='long_command_string'</I>), <B>Automation Tools:</B> Tools like <I>Ansible</I>, <I>Puppet</I>, <I>Chef</I> which 'cast spells' (apply configurations) to manage systems., <I>aspell(1)</I>, <I>hunspell(1)</I>, <I>ispell(1)</I> (These are actual spell-checking tools, often confused due to name similarity but functionally unrelated to a hypothetical 'spellcast' automation tool).


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>spfquery</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>sender_IP</i> <i>envelope_from</i> [<i>helo_identity</i>]<br><b>spfquery</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>-i input_file</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s <sender_ip></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the IP address of the sending host.<br><br><b>-l <envelope_from_address></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the envelope-from email address (e.g., <i>user@example.com</i>).<br><br><b>-h <helo_identity></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the HELO/EHLO identity provided by the sending host.<br><br><b>-i <input_file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads query parameters from a specified file, with one query per line. Each line should contain <i>sender_IP</i> <i>envelope_from</i> [<i>helo_identity</i>].<br><br><b>-r <recipient_address></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the recipient address (optional, primarily for specific policy testing that might depend on recipient).<br><br><b>-d <domain></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the domain to query directly, overriding the domain derived from the envelope-from address.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing details of DNS queries and evaluation steps.<br><br><b>-t <timeout></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the DNS query timeout in seconds.<br><br><b>-o <spf_record_string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides the SPF record for testing purposes, allowing direct input of an SPF string instead of performing a DNS lookup.<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides an explanation of the SPF result.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the parsed SPF record.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the program's version number and exits.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>spfquery</b> is a command-line utility used to test and debug Sender Policy Framework (SPF) DNS records. It simulates an email reception scenario by taking a sender's IP address, an envelope-from (sender's email) address, and an optional HELO/EHLO identity.<br><br>The tool then performs a DNS lookup for the SPF record associated with the domain of the envelope-from address and evaluates it against the provided input parameters. This allows administrators to verify if their SPF records are correctly configured and if incoming emails would pass, fail, or softfail based on the defined policies. It's an invaluable tool for email server administrators and security professionals to ensure proper email authentication and combat spam and phishing.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>spfquery</b> relies on DNS lookups; therefore, network connectivity and correct DNS configuration are crucial for its operation.<br><br>It simulates the SPF check process based on the protocol specifications; however, actual email server behavior might differ slightly depending on the specific Mail Transfer Agent's (MTA) SPF implementation or local policies. This tool focuses solely on SPF and does not consider other email authentication methods like DKIM or DMARC.


title: RETURN VALUES
content:
<b>spfquery</b> typically outputs the SPF result (e.g., "Pass", "Fail", "SoftFail", "Neutral", "None", "PermError", "TempError") followed by an optional reason or explanation. The exit code of the command indicates the success or failure of the query itself (0 for successful query and SPF result, non-zero for internal errors like network issues or invalid arguments).


title: COMMON USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
To check an email originating from <i>192.0.2.1</i>, with an envelope-from address of <i>user@example.com</i>, and a HELO name of <i>mail.example.com</i>, you would use:<br><b>spfquery -s 192.0.2.1 -l user@example.com -h mail.example.com</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
SPF (Sender Policy Framework) was developed as an email authentication method to prevent sender address forgery. <b>spfquery</b> emerged as a vital tool to help administrators implement and test SPF records effectively. It is commonly found as part of the <i>spf-tools</i> package or the <i>pyspf</i> Python module, reflecting its development within the Python ecosystem for email and DNS handling. Its design and usage have remained consistent, making it a primary utility for debugging SPF configuration issues.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>sphinx-build</I> -b <I>buildername</I> [OPTIONS] <I>sourcedir</I> <I>outputdir</I> [<I>filenames</I>...]<br><I>sphinx-build</I> -M <I>buildername</I> [OPTIONS] <I>sourcedir</I> <I>outputdir</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-b <I>buildername</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the builder to use for generating the output. Common builders include <B>html</B>, <B>latex</B>, <B>man</B>, <B>epub</B>, and <B>text</B>.<br><br><b>-M <I>buildername</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates 'master' builder mode. This is often used by generated Makefiles and typically implies a cleaner build environment.<br><br><b>-a</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces a full rebuild of all documents, even if they appear up-to-date. Useful for ensuring consistency.<br><br><b>-E</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't use a saved environment, forcing re-reading of all source files and rebuilding internal structures. Similar to <B>-a</B> but specifically targets the environment.<br><br><b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activates 'nitpicky' mode. In this mode, Sphinx will warn about all missing references (e.g., to classes, functions, or external documentation) that it can't resolve.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses output for standard messages, only showing warnings and errors.<br><br><b>-Q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all output, including warnings and errors. Useful for automated scripts where only the exit code matters.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases verbosity. Can be specified multiple times (e.g., <B>-vvv</B>) for more detailed output, including debug information.<br><br><b>-w <I>file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes all warnings and errors to the specified <I>file</I> instead of standard error.<br><br><b>-W</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Turns all warnings into errors. The build process will exit with a non-zero status code if any warnings occur, preventing an incomplete or problematic build.<br><br><b>-T</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show full traceback on exceptions. Useful for debugging crashes within Sphinx itself or its extensions.<br><br><b>-c <I>confdir</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative directory for the <B>conf.py</B> configuration file. By default, Sphinx looks for <B>conf.py</B> in the <I>sourcedir</I>.<br><br><b>-D <I>setting</I>=<I>value</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides a configuration <I>setting</I> defined in <B>conf.py</B> with the specified <I>value</I>. Can be used multiple times.<br><br><b>-t <I>tag</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a tag. Conditional content marked with <B>.. only:: &lt;tag&gt;</B> directives will only be included if the tag is defined. Can be used multiple times.<br><br><b>-j <I>N</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs the build in parallel with <I>N</I> jobs. 'auto' uses the number of CPU cores. Improves build time for large projects on multi-core systems.<br><br><b><I>sourcedir</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the directory containing the project's source documentation files (e.g., <B>.rst</B> or <B>.md</B> files) and typically the <B>conf.py</B> configuration file.<br><br><b><I>outputdir</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the directory where the generated documentation will be placed. This directory will be created if it does not exist.<br><br><b>[<I>filenames</I>...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. A list of specific source file paths (relative to <I>sourcedir</I>) to rebuild. If omitted, all modified files (or all files with <B>-a</B> or <B>-E</B>) are built.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b><I>sphinx-build</I></b> command is the primary command-line utility for generating documentation using the Sphinx documentation generator.<br>It processes source files, typically written in reStructuredText or MyST (Markdown), and converts them into various output formats, known as 'builders'. Common output formats include HTML (static websites), LaTeX (for PDF generation), man pages, and EPUB ebooks.<br><b><I>sphinx-build</I></b> manages the entire build process: parsing source files, resolving cross-references, applying themes, indexing content, and managing the build environment to ensure efficient incremental builds.<br>It is widely used in the Python ecosystem and beyond for project documentation, books, and articles, offering powerful features like extensibility through extensions, internationalization, and a clean separation of content and presentation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires a <B>conf.py</B> configuration file, typically located in the <I>sourcedir</I>, to define project-specific settings and extensions.<br>Build performance can vary significantly based on project size, number of extensions, and chosen builder.<br>The <I>outputdir</I> should not be the same as the <I>sourcedir</I> to avoid conflicts and accidental deletion of source files during cleanup operations.


title: BUILDERS
content:
Sphinx uses 'builders' to convert the parsed document tree into various output formats. Each builder is specialized for a particular output type. Common builders include <B>html</B> (for static web pages), <B>latex</B> (which can then be compiled to PDF), <B>man</B> (for Unix manual pages), <B>epub</B> (for e-readers), and <B>text</B> (for plain text output). You select a builder using the <B>-b</B> option.


title: CONFIGURATION (CONF.PY)
content:
The <B>conf.py</B> file is the central configuration file for a Sphinx project. It's a Python script where you define project metadata (e.g., project name, author), enable extensions, specify themes, and customize various build behaviors. <B>sphinx-build</B> reads this file to understand how to process and build your documentation.


title: BUILD ENVIRONMENT
content:
Sphinx maintains a 'build environment' in the <B>.doctrees</B> directory (or specified by <B>-d</B>) within your <I>outputdir</I>. This environment caches parsed document trees and metadata, allowing Sphinx to perform incremental builds very quickly by only processing files that have changed since the last build. The <B>-E</B> option can be used to explicitly discard this cached environment.


title: HISTORY
content:
Sphinx was created by Georg Brandl in 2008, initially to build the official Python documentation. Its ease of use, extensibility, and high-quality output quickly led to its adoption by a wider community for general project documentation. It popularized the use of reStructuredText for technical documentation and later introduced support for MyST (Markdown), further expanding its reach. Its development is community-driven and continues to evolve as a cornerstone of technical documentation.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
There is no standard `spi` command with a general-purpose synopsis in Linux. Interactions with SPI hardware are typically done programmatically through device files and system calls, or via specialized tools provided by hardware vendors or specific projects.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Since 'spi' is not a standard command, there are no predefined command-line parameters. Any parameters would be specific to custom applications or scripts designed to interact with SPI hardware.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The term "spi" in the Linux context typically refers to the <I>Serial Peripheral Interface</I> (SPI) bus, a synchronous serial data link standard widely used for short-distance communication, primarily in embedded systems. It is not a standalone command-line utility found in standard Linux distributions similar to "ls" or "grep".<br><br>Instead, interaction with SPI hardware devices on a Linux system is managed through the kernel's SPI subsystem. Userspace applications generally communicate with SPI devices via specific kernel modules like <I>spidev</I>, which exposes the SPI bus as device files (e.g., <I>/dev/spidev0.0</I>). Applications then use system calls, primarily <I>ioctl()</I>, to configure the bus (e.g., clock speed, mode, bits per word) and transfer data. This approach requires custom programming (e.g., in C or Python) rather than invoking a generic "spi" command.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Confusing 'spi' (the hardware interface) with a direct command-line utility is a common misconception. Direct manipulation of SPI devices typically requires root privileges and careful programming to avoid hardware damage or unintended behavior. The specific device file paths (e.g., <I>/dev/spidevX.Y</I>) and the available <I>ioctl</I> commands depend on the kernel configuration and the specific SPI controller hardware.


title: INTERACTING WITH SPI IN LINUX USERSPACE
content:
To communicate with an SPI device from userspace, a program typically opens the corresponding <I>/dev/spidevX.Y</I> device file. It then uses <I>ioctl()</I> calls to configure the SPI mode, clock speed, bit order, and bits per word. Data transfer is then performed using <I>ioctl(SPI_IOC_MESSAGE)</I> or sometimes <I>read()/write()</I> for simpler cases. This requires programming in languages like C, C++, Python (using libraries like <I>spidev-py</I>), or Rust.


title: COMMON SPI APPLICATIONS
content:
SPI is extensively used for connecting microcontrollers to peripherals such as SD card readers, EEPROMs, flash memory, real-time clocks, ADCs (Analog-to-Digital Converters), DACs (Digital-to-Analog Converters), and various sensors (e.g., accelerometers, gyroscopes, temperature sensors). It's also frequently used for driving small LCD/OLED displays.


title: HISTORY
content:
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) was developed by Motorola in the mid-1980s. Its simplicity, full-duplex communication, and high speed made it popular for embedded systems. Linux kernel support for SPI has evolved significantly, with dedicated drivers for various SPI controllers and devices. The <I>spidev</I> module became a common way to expose the SPI bus to userspace, abstracting the complex hardware interactions and providing a standardized interface for application developers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>apply</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies all configured themes, extensions, and apps to the Spotify client. This command is crucial after any configuration changes.<br><br><b><b>backup</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a backup of the current Spotify client's original files and configurations before <i>Spicetify</i> modifications are made. Essential for safety.<br><br><b><b>restore</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restores the Spotify client to its original state from a backup, effectively removing all <i>Spicetify</i> customizations.<br><br><b><b>config</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages <i>Spicetify</i>'s core configuration settings. Used to enable/disable themes, extensions, and apps, or to set paths. It supports sub-commands like <i>set</i>, <i>get</i>, <i>add</i>, <i>remove</i>, <i>inject</i>, <i>uninject</i>, and <i>reset</i>.<br><br><b><b>update</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Updates <i>Spicetify</i> to its latest version. This command often re-applies customizations if Spotify's internal structure has changed.<br><br><b><b>enable-devtool</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables developer tools within the Spotify client, which are useful for debugging custom themes and extensions.<br><br><b><b>disable-devtool</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables developer tools within the Spotify client.<br><br><b><b>watch</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitors <i>Spicetify</i>'s configuration files for changes and automatically applies them to the Spotify client in real-time.<br><br><b><b>path</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the installation path of <i>Spicetify</i> and its configuration directory.<br><br><b><b>version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the current version of the <i>Spicetify</i> tool.<br><br><b><b>help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for the <i>Spicetify</i> command or specific sub-commands.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Spicetify</i> is a powerful command-line tool designed to extensively customize the official Spotify desktop client. It functions by injecting custom CSS, JavaScript, and other resources into the Spotify application's files, allowing for a broad range of modifications. Users leverage <i>Spicetify</i> to apply custom themes that drastically change the visual appearance, install extensions to introduce new functionalities (such as lyrics, ad-blocking, or enhanced playback controls), and integrate custom applications directly into Spotify. This utility is particularly favored by Linux users who seek greater control and personalization over their desktop applications, pushing Spotify's customization capabilities far beyond its default settings. <i>Spicetify</i> also offers essential commands for backing up and restoring original configurations, updating the tool, and managing various customization components, ensuring a flexible and recoverable customization experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Spicetify</i> directly modifies Spotify's application files, which can sometimes lead to instability or require re-application of customizations after Spotify client updates. Users might need to re-run <b>spicetify apply</b> or <b>spicetify update</b> after a Spotify client update to fix issues. While widely used, such modifications might technically fall outside Spotify's terms of service. For Spotify installed via sandboxed methods like Snap or Flatpak, additional permissions or setup steps are often necessary to allow <i>Spicetify</i> to access and modify the application's files.


title: INSTALLATION METHODS
content:
<i>Spicetify</i> can be installed using a convenient one-liner script provided for most Linux distributions, or through manual installation for users desiring more control. For Arch Linux users, it's typically available via the Arch User Repository (AUR).<br><br><b>Important Note:</b> If Spotify is installed using Snap or Flatpak, extra steps are often required. This usually involves granting <i>Spicetify</i> explicit permissions to interact with the sandboxed Spotify application, often via commands like <b>sudo snap connect spotify:hostfs</b> for Snap installations, or similar Flatpak commands.


title: COMMUNITY AND RESOURCES
content:
The <i>Spicetify</i> project boasts an active community primarily found on GitHub and Reddit. The official GitHub repository serves as the central hub for documentation, issue tracking, and contributions. This community is a rich source for a vast array of user-created themes, extensions, and apps, significantly enhancing the Spotify customization ecosystem. Many popular customizations are directly maintained and distributed through community repositories linked from the main project.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Spicetify</i> originated as an open-source initiative, driven by the community's desire for deeper customization of the Spotify desktop client beyond the limited official options. It rapidly gained popularity, especially within the Linux desktop community, due to its powerful capabilities and flexibility. Its development is entirely community-driven, with continuous contributions of themes, extensions, and bug fixes, ensuring its evolution alongside changes in the Spotify client itself.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>spike</B> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <I>ELF_FILE</I> [<I>ARGS</I>...]<br><B>spike</B> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] --dtb<br><B>spike</B> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] --dump-dts


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--isa=<ISA></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the RISC-V ISA string to simulate (e.g., RV64IMAFDVC).<br><br><b>--priv=<MODE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the initial privilege mode for simulation (e.g., M, S, U for Machine, Supervisor, User).<br><br><b>--mem=<ADDR:SIZE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Define a custom memory region for the simulated system (e.g., 0x80000000:0x10000000).<br><br><b>-p<N> or --procs=<N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Simulate a system with N number of RISC-V processors (HARTs).<br><br><b>-d or --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enter the interactive debugger mode upon starting the simulation.<br><br><b>-l or --log</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Log every executed instruction to standard error (stderr).<br><br><b>--gdb-port=<PORT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start a GDB remote debugging server on the specified TCP port.<br><br><b>--pk or --no-pk</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable or disable the preloading of the RISC-V proxy kernel (<I>pk</I>).<br><br><b>--varch=<VLEN:ELEN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the vector architecture configuration, defining vector register length (VLEN) and element length (ELEN).<br><br><b>--device-tree-source=<FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a custom device tree source file (.dts) instead of generating one.<br><br><b>--device-tree-blob=<FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a custom compiled device tree blob file (.dtb).<br><br><b>--dtb</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generate a default device tree blob based on configured parameters and exit.<br><br><b>--dump-dts</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump the generated device tree source to standard output and exit.<br><br><b>--log-file=<FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Direct all log output to the specified file instead of stderr.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<B>spike</B> is the functional RISC-V Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) simulator, primarily used for developing and testing RISC-V software. It allows developers to run RISC-V compiled programs on a host machine (like x86-64) without requiring actual RISC-V hardware. This makes it an invaluable tool for early-stage software development, ISA research, and debugging. <B>spike</B> accurately models the RISC-V architecture, including its various extensions (e.g., M, A, F, D, V), privilege modes, and memory management units. It often works in conjunction with the RISC-V proxy kernel (<I>pk</I>) to provide a basic execution environment for user-space applications. It supports various debugging features and allows detailed logging of instruction execution and architectural state.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<li><B>spike</B> is a functional simulator, meaning it prioritizes correct instruction execution and architectural behavior over cycle-accurate timing.</li><li>It typically requires a compiled RISC-V ELF binary, which is usually generated using the <I>riscv-gnu-toolchain</I>.</li><li>For complex applications or OSes, the RISC-V proxy kernel (<I>pk</I>) or a full OS image is often necessary.</li><li>Simulation performance is significantly slower than native execution or real hardware.</li>


title: <B>PROXY KERNEL (PK)</B>
content:
Many <B>spike</B> executions, especially for user-space applications, rely on the RISC-V proxy kernel (<I>pk</I>). The <I>pk</I> provides a lightweight, bare-metal environment that offers system calls (like file I/O, memory allocation) by proxying them to the host operating system. This allows RISC-V applications to run with minimal porting effort.


title: <B>DEBUGGING WITH GDB</B>
content:
<B>spike</B> can be started with the <I>--gdb-port</I> option to open a GDB remote debugging stub. This enables developers to use the standard GNU Debugger (<I>gdb</I>) to connect to the running <B>spike</B> instance, inspect registers, memory, set breakpoints, and step through RISC-V code, significantly aiding in software debugging.


title: HISTORY
content:
<B>spike</B> was developed by the RISC-V Foundation (now RISC-V International) as the reference functional simulator for the RISC-V ISA. It originated early in the RISC-V project's history, alongside the specification itself, to provide a rapid prototyping and software development platform before hardware implementations became widely available. Its development is ongoing, evolving with the RISC-V specification to support new extensions and features. It serves as a crucial component of the RISC-V software ecosystem, underpinning much of the early software porting and validation efforts.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-in <i>filename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input SPKAC file.<br><br><b>-out <i>filename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file for the processed SPKAC or extracted data.<br><br><b>-key <i>filename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the private key file to use for signing when creating an SPKAC.<br><br><b>-passin <i>arg</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the password for the input private key file.<br><br><b>-verify</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verifies the signature of the SPKAC input file.<br><br><b>-pubkey</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the public key extracted from the SPKAC.<br><br><b>-challenge <i>string</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the challenge password string within the SPKAC.<br><br><b>-spkac_text</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the SPKAC data in a human-readable text form, showing its components.<br><br><b>-text</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the entire certificate request (if encapsulated) in a more verbose text form.<br><br><b>-noout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents output of the encoded SPKAC data; useful with <b>-text</b> or <b>-verify</b>.<br><br><b>-C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the SPKAC in C source code format, suitable for embedding.<br><br><b>-nocomments</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses comments in text outputs (when using <b>-spkac_text</b> or <b>-text</b>).<br><br><b>-digest <i>alg</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the digest algorithm to use, e.g., <b>-md5</b>, <b>-sha1</b>, <b>-sha256</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>spkac</i> is an <b>openssl</b> subcommand used for creating, processing, and verifying Signed Public Key And Challenge (SPKAC) files. These files represent a legacy format primarily used by Netscape Navigator clients (and compatible browsers) for generating and submitting certificate signing requests directly from an HTML form using the &lt;KEYGEN&gt; tag. An SPKAC contains a public key, a challenge string, and a signature over both, signed by the private key corresponding to the public key. This command allows you to examine the contents of an SPKAC, verify its signature, extract the public key, or (less commonly) create new SPKACs. While largely superseded by PKCS#10 (handled by <b>openssl req</b>) and more modern enrollment protocols, <b>openssl spkac</b> remains useful for handling older systems or debugging legacy certificate enrollment processes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>spkac.1s</i> refers to the <b>spkac</b> subcommand of the <b>openssl</b> utility, not a standalone command. It is primarily concerned with a legacy certificate enrollment format associated with older web browsers. Modern certificate requests typically use PKCS#10 format, which is handled by the <b>openssl req</b> command, offering more flexibility and standardization.


title: FORMAT ORIGIN
content:
SPKAC (Signed Public Key And Challenge) is a format defined primarily by Netscape for client-side key generation and certificate enrollment. It's considered a simpler variant or precursor to PKCS#10 certificate signing requests (CSRs).


title: HTML <I>KEYGEN</I> TAG
content:
Historically, SPKAC requests were generated in web browsers using the now-deprecated HTML <b>&lt;KEYGEN&gt;</b> tag. When a user submitted a form containing this tag, the browser would generate a new private key and public key pair, sign the public key along with a challenge string, and send the resulting SPKAC data to the server.


title: HISTORY
content:
The SPKAC format and its associated <i>&lt;KEYGEN&gt;</i> HTML tag were developed by Netscape Communications in the 1990s as a method for web browsers to generate a new key pair and request a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) directly from a web page. The <b>openssl spkac</b> command was implemented as part of the OpenSSL toolkit to provide server-side processing capabilities for these requests. While the <i>&lt;KEYGEN&gt;</i> tag is deprecated in modern HTML5, and SPKAC is largely superseded by more standardized and flexible PKCS#10 requests, the command remains in OpenSSL for compatibility with legacy systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>--help</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br><b><I>--version</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information and exits.<br><br><b><I>--color</I> / <I>--no-color</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables or disables colored output for explanations, enhancing readability.<br><br><b><I>--search</I> / <I>--no-search</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables or disables searching for explanations on external online sources if the primary internal explanation is insufficient.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>splain</b> is a command-line utility designed to provide clearer explanations for often cryptic or obscure error messages encountered in the terminal. It aims to demystify output from various commands, making debugging easier for users, especially those new to Linux or specific programming environments. While particularly useful for <I>Perl</I>-related errors, it can interpret and explain a wide range of common system and application messages. It attempts to rephrase technical jargon into more understandable terms, sometimes offering potential solutions or next steps. It is part of the <I>App::Splain</I> Perl module and relies on an internal knowledge base as well as, optionally, external sources for explanations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>splain</b> is not a built-in or universally available Linux command; it requires <I>Perl</I> and the <I>App::Splain</I> module to be installed separately. Its effectiveness depends on its internal knowledge base and the availability of relevant external sources, meaning it may not cover all possible error messages or commands. While generally helpful, explanations might sometimes be incomplete, less precise, or unavailable for highly specific, custom, or newly emerging scenarios.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
Since <b>splain</b> is part of the <I>App::Splain</I> Perl module, it is typically installed using Perl's <I>CPAN</I> client. You may need to install <I>cpanm</I> first for easier installation.<br><br><b>Example (using cpanm):</b><br>sudo <b>cpanm</b> App::Splain<br><br><b>Example (using CPAN):</b><br>sudo <b>cpan</b> App::Splain


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
<b>splain</b> can take an error message as a direct argument or read from standard input.<br><br><b>Example 1: Explaining a Perl error</b><br><b>splain</b> "Global symbol \"$foo\" requires explicit package name"<br><br><b>Example 2: Explaining a common shell error</b><br><b>splain</b> "ls: cannot access 'nonexistent_file': No such file or directory"<br><br><b>Example 3: Piping an error message from dmesg</b><br><b>dmesg</b> | <b>grep</b> -i "kernel panic" | <b>splain</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>splain</b> originated as a <I>Perl</I> module, <I>App::Splain</I>, created by <I>David Golden</I>. Its primary motivation was to address the common challenge of deciphering complex and often cryptic error messages, particularly those generated by <I>Perl</I> itself. It became a valuable tool for developers and users seeking clearer, human-readable explanations for common programming and system errors, making debugging more accessible. It is continuously maintained and updated through the <I>CPAN</I> ecosystem.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
split [<i>OPTION</i>]... [<i>FILE</i> [<i>PREFIX</i>]]<br><br><i>FILE</i>: The input file to be split. If omitted or '-', reads from standard input.<br><i>PREFIX</i>: The prefix for output file names. Default is 'x'.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a, --numeric-suffixes[=FROM]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generate numeric suffixes (e.g., 00, 01) instead of alphabetic ones. <i>FROM</i> specifies the starting number (default 0).<br><br><b>-b, --bytes=SIZE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Split the input file into chunks, each <i>SIZE</i> bytes long. <i>SIZE</i> can be an integer with an optional unit (e.g., <i>100M</i> for 100 megabytes, <i>2G</i> for 2 gigabytes).<br><br><b>-C, --line-bytes=SIZE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Similar to <i>-b</i>, but ensures that output files contain complete lines and at most <i>SIZE</i> bytes. Lines longer than <i>SIZE</i> will still be output but may cause the file to exceed <i>SIZE</i>.<br><br><b>-d, --numeric-suffixes</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use numeric suffixes (00, 01, ...) instead of alphabetic ones. This is a shorthand for <i>-a</i> without specifying a starting number.<br><br><b>-e, --elide-empty-files</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not generate empty output files when using the <i>-n</i> option.<br><br><b>-l, --lines=NUMBER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Split the input file into chunks, each <i>NUMBER</i> lines long.<br><br><b>-n, --number=CHUNKS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Divide the input file into <i>CHUNKS</i> number of parts. This option has various sub-options like <i>l/NUMBER</i> (NUMBER lines per file), <i>r/NUMBER</i> (NUMBER files, approximate size), or <i>x/NUMBER</i> (NUMBER files, exact size).<br><br><b>-p, --preserve-leading-zeros</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When using numeric suffixes, preserve leading zeros (e.g., x001 instead of x1) for consistent file naming.<br><br><b>-t, --separator=SEPARATOR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use <i>SEPARATOR</i> as the line delimiter instead of the default newline character.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print a diagnostic message for every output file created, showing its name and size.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>split</b> is a command-line utility used to break a single file into multiple smaller files. It's highly flexible, allowing users to specify the size of the output files by number of lines (using <i>-l</i>), number of bytes (using <i>-b</i>), or by ensuring a maximum number of bytes per line (using <i>-C</i>). Alternatively, it can divide a file into a specified number of equal-sized chunks (using <i>-n</i>).<br><br>By default, <b>split</b> creates output files with a prefix of 'x' followed by two-character alphabetic suffixes (e.g., xaa, xab, xac). Users can customize the prefix and choose to use numeric suffixes (with <i>-d</i> or <i>-a</i>). This command is particularly useful for handling very large files, making them easier to transfer, process, or store on systems with file size limitations. It also facilitates parallel processing of data by breaking it into smaller, more manageable parts.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Be cautious when splitting very large files into extremely small pieces, as it can generate a massive number of output files, potentially exhausting inode limits or cluttering directories.<br><br>The <i>-n</i> option with 'r' or 'x' modes provides approximate or exact splits respectively, but actual file sizes may vary slightly depending on line lengths and the chosen unit. When using <i>-C</i>, lines will not be truncated, but the file size limit might be exceeded if a single line is larger than the specified <i>SIZE</i>.


title: OUTPUT FILENAME PATTERN
content:
<b>split</b> generates output files by appending suffixes to the specified <i>PREFIX</i>. By default, it uses two-character alphabetic suffixes (aa, ab, ac...). The number of suffix characters increases automatically if more than 26*26 (676) files are needed. Numeric suffixes can be chosen with <i>-d</i> or <i>-a</i>.


title: REASSEMBLING FILES
content:
Files split with <b>split</b> can typically be reassembled using the <b>cat</b> command. For example, if you split 'original_file' into 'xaa', 'xab', 'xac', etc., you can reassemble them using: <i>cat x* > original_file_restored</i>. Ensure the files are concatenated in the correct order, which is naturally handled by the default naming scheme.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>split</b> command is a fundamental utility that has been part of Unix-like operating systems since their early versions. It is included in the GNU Core Utilities (<i>coreutils</i>) package, which provides essential tools for file, text, and shell manipulation on Linux systems. Its core functionality has remained consistent over decades, proving its enduring utility for managing large data files.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>splitdiff</b> is a utility designed to process the output of a unified diff and break it down into separate diffs for each file that has been changed. This is exceptionally useful when reviewing large patch files or diffs generated from version control systems (like <b>git diff</b> or <b>svn diff</b>) that encompass modifications across numerous files. Rather than navigating one long, monolithic diff, <b>splitdiff</b> allows users to view or process changes on a file-by-file basis. It typically reads the unified diff from standard input and outputs individual diffs to standard output, often separated by clear headers for each file. This command significantly enhances the readability and manageability of complex code changes, making it simpler to analyze, apply, or reject specific file modifications independently. It's frequently employed as a pre-processor for other tools that are designed to handle single-file diffs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The standard GNU <b>splitdiff</b> utility is remarkably simple: it operates strictly on standard input and produces output on standard output without accepting any command-line options or arguments. It rigorously expects its input to be in the <I>unified diff format</I>; other diff formats (such as context diffs) will not be correctly processed and may lead to unexpected output. Its output is also in the unified diff format, but segmented by file.<br>While some third-party or custom <b>splitdiff</b> scripts might offer minimal options (e.g., for output directories), the canonical GNU version focuses solely on its core task of parsing and splitting unified diff output.


title: TYPICAL WORKFLOW
content:
To view a large unified diff (e.g., from a patch file) one file at a time using a pager:<br><b><I>cat my_patch.diff | splitdiff | less</I></b><br><br>To split the output of a <b>git diff</b> into viewable chunks:<br><b><I>git diff | splitdiff | less</I></b><br>This allows you to navigate through the changes for each file individually, making large code reviews more manageable.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>splitdiff</b> utility is often distributed as part of the GNU Diffutils package, which provides a comprehensive suite of tools for comparing files and directories. While its specific development history might be less documented than core utilities like <b>diff</b> or <b>patch</b>, its emergence stems from the widespread adoption of unified diffs in version control systems and modern software development practices. In workflows where reviewing changes file-by-file is a frequent necessity, <b>splitdiff</b> serves as a straightforward yet highly effective helper script. Its design embodies the Unix philosophy of providing small, specialized tools that perform one task well, thereby facilitating more modular and manageable development processes.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>input_font_file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the source font file that needs to be processed and split.<br><br><b><i>output_prefix_or_directory</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;An optional argument specifying either a prefix for the names of the output files or a directory where the split font files should be placed. If omitted, a default might be used or files created in the current directory.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;character_range&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines specific character ranges (e.g., Unicode code points like U+0000-U+00FF) to use as criteria for splitting the font, creating separate files for each specified range.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>&lt;output_directory&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target directory where the resulting split font files will be saved.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>&lt;output_prefix&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a common prefix for the filenames of the multiple output font files generated by the splitting process.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose mode, providing more detailed information about the splitting process, such as progress updates or file generation details.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message, typically showing usage information and a list of available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>splitfont</b> utility is typically employed to divide a large font file into multiple smaller font files. This is often done for bitmap fonts, such as those in the Bitmap Distribution Format (BDF), commonly used within the X Window System. The primary purpose of splitting fonts can be to optimize font loading, manage memory more efficiently, or to create subsets of a font containing specific character ranges or languages.<br><br>While not a standard command with a dedicated man page on most modern Linux distributions, its functionality is sometimes incorporated into larger font processing toolchains or custom scripts. It helps in breaking down monolithic font files into more manageable components, especially useful in environments with resource constraints or for specific font distribution needs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>splitfont</b> command is not a standard utility found in most Linux distributions' core packages. Its existence and functionality are highly dependent on specific font tool suites (e.g., older X11 font utilities, FontForge scripts, or custom scripts). Users should not expect it to be available by default and may need to compile it from source or locate it within specialized font development environments. The exact syntax and available options can vary significantly depending on the specific implementation found.


title: TYPICAL USE CASES
content:
<br><b>Optimizing X11 Font Loading</b>: Breaking down large <i>BDF</i> or <i>PCF</i> fonts into smaller, character-set-specific files to reduce memory footprint and speed up font loading for particular locales.<br><b>Creating Font Subsets</b>: Generating smaller font files containing only the glyphs required for a specific language or application, thereby significantly reducing overall file size for distribution or embedding.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of splitting fonts, particularly bitmap fonts like BDF, emerged in the context of X Window System font management. Large font files, especially those containing many character sets, could be inefficient to load or manage on systems with limited resources. Tools or scripts designed to 'split' these fonts into smaller, more manageable parts for specific character ranges or languages became useful. While no single, universally adopted <b>splitfont</b> command exists, the functionality it implies has been implemented in various forms within font processing toolchains and custom utilities, primarily aimed at optimizing X11 font distribution and rendering.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b>, <b>--append</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Append to the given file(s) instead of overwriting.<br><br><b><b>-D</b>, <b>--directory</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create missing parent directories for the output file.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not write anything; just show what would be done.<br><br><b><b>-N</b>, <b>--no-create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not create the output file if it does not already exist. An error occurs if the file is missing.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--preserve-permissions</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preserve the permissions of the original file, if it exists.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress most error messages.<br><br><b><b>-u</b>, <b>--unbuffered</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Open the output file immediately but still read all input before closing. Usually defeats the primary purpose of `<i>sponge</i>` for in-place modifications, but can be useful when writing to pipes to ensure immediate data flow.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
`<i>sponge</i>` is a command-line utility from the `<i>moreutils</i>` package designed to act as a buffer for standard input. Unlike `<i>tee</i>`, which writes data to files immediately as it receives it, `<i>sponge</i>` reads and accumulates <b>all</b> its input from standard input before it begins writing any data to the specified output file(s). This unique buffering behavior is crucial for safely performing in-place modifications of files using pipelines. For instance, if you try to `<i>grep</i>` or `<i>sed</i>` a file and redirect its output back to the same file (`<i>grep pattern file > file</i>`), the shell might truncate the file before `<i>grep</i>` has finished reading it, leading to data loss. `<i>sponge</i>` solves this by ensuring the output file is only opened and written to after the entire input stream has been consumed, preventing accidental self-truncation. It acts as a safety net, making pipelines robust. If no output file is specified, `<i>sponge</i>` writes to standard output, effectively acting as an intelligent buffer.


title: CAVEATS
content:
`<i>sponge</i>` buffers <b>all</b> its input in memory. For very large input streams (gigabytes or more), this can lead to significant memory consumption and potential performance issues or system instability due to out-of-memory errors.<br>It is not suitable for processing unbounded or real-time data streams, as it must wait for the end of the input (EOF) before writing.<br>While it prevents self-truncation, it does not provide atomic updates across multiple processes concurrently accessing the same file.


title: COMMON USE CASE: IN-PLACE FILE MODIFICATION
content:
The primary use of `<i>sponge</i>` is to safely modify a file in-place using standard pipelines. For example, to remove all lines containing '<i>obsolete</i>' from `<i>my_file.txt</i>`:<br> `<i>grep -v obsolete my_file.txt | sponge my_file.txt</i>`<br>Without `<i>sponge</i>`, `<i>grep -v obsolete my_file.txt > my_file.txt</i>` would likely truncate `<i>my_file.txt</i>` before `<i>grep</i>` finishes reading it, leading to data loss.


title: BUFFERING MECHANISM
content:
`<i>sponge</i>`'s core functionality relies on reading its entire input into an internal memory buffer. Only after the End-Of-File (EOF) marker is received, signifying that all input has been read, does `<i>sponge</i>` then open the specified output file(s) and write the buffered content. This 'read-all-then-write' mechanism is what prevents race conditions and truncation when modifying files in a pipeline where the source and destination are the same.


title: HISTORY
content:
`<i>sponge</i>` is part of the `<i>moreutils</i>` collection of command-line utilities, which are designed to fill common gaps in standard Unix toolsets. Developed by Joey Hess, `<i>moreutils</i>` aims to provide simple, robust, and single-purpose tools. `<i>sponge</i>` was specifically created to solve the long-standing problem of safely modifying a file in-place when using standard input/output redirection in shell pipelines, a problem that `<i>sed -i</i>` or temporary files usually address but `<i>sponge</i>` provides a more general pipeline-friendly solution.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>Not applicable</i> - The <b>"sport"</b> command is not a standard Linux utility with a defined syntax.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>"sport"</b> command is not a standard, widely distributed, or officially documented utility found in common Linux distributions.<br>Extensive research across various documentation, manual pages, and package repositories indicates no public record or widespread usage of a command explicitly named <b>"sport"</b> within the typical Linux ecosystem.<br>As such, it lacks a defined set of functionalities, a standard syntax, or a clear set of parameters that would be attributable to a universally recognized command.<br>Therefore, specific details regarding its intended purpose, operational behavior, or historical development cannot be provided as they would for a standard and well-established command like <b>ls</b>, <b>grep</b>, or <b>man</b>.<br>It is highly probable that this name refers to a custom script created for a specific local environment, a very niche or private utility not part of mainstream distributions, or potentially a typo for another existing command.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command name does not correspond to any widely distributed or officially documented Linux utility.<br>Users encountering this command might be dealing with a custom local script, a very specialized and uncommon software package, or a misremembered command name.<br>Please verify the source or context if you expect a specific functionality from a <b>"sport"</b> command.


title: VERIFICATION
content:
If you encountered <b>"sport"</b> in a specific context, please confirm its origin.<br>It might be an alias, a shell function, or a program installed as part of a custom environment on a specific system.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Not applicable</i> - There is no historical record of development or widespread usage for a standard <b>"sport"</b> command in Linux.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>spottopgm</b> is a specialized utility from the Netpbm toolkit, designed to convert SPOT satellite image files into the Portable Graymap (PGM) format. It reads a SPOT image file from either a specified file path or standard input, and then outputs the resulting PGM image to standard output. This allows for seamless piping with other Netpbm tools or general image processing applications.<br><br>SPOT files are a specific format for satellite imagery, as detailed in the "SPOT Data User's Handbook" by CNES. The command supports two types of SPOT data files: raw data (volume 1) and processed data (volume 2). For raw data files, it requires a specific header that typically resides on a tape block boundary before the image data, which often needs to be extracted using tools like <b>dd</b>. This utility is crucial for integrating SPOT satellite imagery into workflows that leverage the Netpbm suite for further manipulation or format conversion.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>spottopgm</b> requires specific SPOT file formats. For raw SPOT data (volume 1), a header block must precede the image data. This header is typically found on a tape block boundary and may need to be extracted using tools like <b>dd</b> before being passed to <b>spottopgm</b>. The command's functionality is dependent on the SPOT file adhering to the specifications outlined in the "SPOT Data User's Handbook" by CNES.


title: INPUT/OUTPUT
content:
<b>spottopgm</b> reads input from the file specified as an argument or, if no argument is provided, from standard input. It always writes the resulting PGM image to standard output. This design facilitates piping operations, allowing the output to be directly consumed by other Netpbm utilities or command-line tools for further processing, conversion, or display.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>spottopgm</b> is part of the Netpbm project, a comprehensive suite of graphics programs created by Jef Poskanzer in the late 1980s as the Pbmplus package. Netpbm tools are known for their "Unix philosophy" design, focusing on small, single-purpose utilities that can be chained together. <b>spottopgm</b> was developed to provide interoperability for SPOT satellite imagery, which became increasingly relevant for geographical and environmental analysis. Its inclusion reflects Netpbm's ongoing mission to support a wide array of image formats, even specialized ones like SPOT, allowing users to process and integrate this data within standard Unix-like environments.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>sprio</b> command is not a recognized standard utility found in common Linux distributions or their core packages. No official man pages or widespread documentation describe a command with this specific name. It is highly probable that 'sprio' is either a typographical error, a custom-developed script specific to a particular environment, or part of a very niche or private software installation. Users attempting to execute 'sprio' on a typical Linux system will most likely encounter a 'command not found' error. It is important to verify the exact command intended if this name was encountered.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As <b>sprio</b> is not a standard Linux command, its usage, behavior, and options are undefined. Executing it will almost certainly result in a 'command not found' error on most systems. It is crucial to confirm the correct command name or its source if 'sprio' was encountered in specific documentation or scripts. It is possible it refers to a typo for commands like <code>priocntl</code> or a private script.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no documented history for a standard Linux command named <b>sprio</b> in common distributions or open-source projects. If it exists, it would likely be a very recent, highly specialized, or private utility developed for specific purposes.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output PPM file. If not provided, output is sent to standard output.<br><br><b>-invert</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Inverts the colors of the resulting PPM image during conversion.<br><br><b>-gamma <value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies gamma correction to the image. <I>value</I> is a floating-point number, typically between 0.1 and 10.0.<br><br><b>-verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed conversion progress and debugging information.<br><br><b>-help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b>-version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information and exits.<br><br><b><I>sputfile</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the input SPUT image file. If omitted, <b>sputoppm</b> reads from standard input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>sputoppm</b> is a specialized command-line utility designed to convert image files from the obscure "SPUT" format into the widely supported Netpbm Portable Pixmap (PPM) format. The SPUT format is assumed to be a legacy or proprietary image encoding, often encountered in niche applications or historical data sets.<br><br>This tool aims to bridge the compatibility gap, allowing users to process, view, and manipulate SPUT images using standard image processing tools that support the PPM format. It reads SPUT data from standard input or a specified file and outputs the resulting PPM image to standard output or a designated file. The conversion process attempts to correctly interpret SPUT pixel data, color spaces, and dimensions to render an accurate representation in PPM. Users can apply basic transformations like color inversion and gamma correction during conversion.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command is hypothetical and designed to illustrate a potential image conversion utility. It does not exist as a standard Linux utility in common distributions. The 'SPUT' format is fictional.<br><br>Its functionality, if it were real, would heavily depend on the specific encoding and complexity of the 'SPUT' format, potentially requiring advanced libraries or specific knowledge of the format's internals. Performance might vary significantly based on image size and CPU capabilities. Color space fidelity and accurate reproduction of all 'SPUT' specific features (e.g., alpha channels, metadata) might not be fully supported without explicit format specifications.


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
<ul><li>To convert <I>input.sput</I> to <I>output.ppm</I>:<br><code><b>sputoppm</b> input.sput -o output.ppm</code></li><li>To convert <I>input.sput</I> to <I>output.ppm</I> and invert colors, piping to stdout:<br><code><b>sputoppm</b> -invert input.sput > output.ppm</code></li><li>To process SPUT data from a pipe, applying gamma correction and saving:<br><code>cat sput_data | <b>sputoppm</b> -gamma 2.2 -o corrected.ppm</code></li></ul>


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
Returns 0 on success.<br>Returns a non-zero value on failure, such as an invalid input file, malformed SPUT data, or issues writing to the output file.


title: HISTORY
content:
As a hypothetical command, <b>sputoppm</b> has no real-world development history. However, if it were a real utility, its history would likely parallel other specialized image format converters. It would probably originate from a specific need to handle proprietary or legacy image data, possibly within a particular research institution, industry, or for archiving old media.<br><br>Initial versions might have been simple C programs, evolving over time to include more robust error handling, broader color space support, and perhaps integrating into larger image processing suites or open-source projects like Netpbm. Its usage would be primarily limited to environments where the 'SPUT' format files are encountered, serving as a critical bridge for data migration or interoperability.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>SQUASHFS_IMAGE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The required path to the SquashFS filesystem image file from which the content will be read.<br><br><b><I>PATH_IN_IMAGE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The required path to the specific file within the SquashFS image whose content is to be displayed on standard output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>sqfscat</I> is a lightweight command-line utility, typically found as part of the <I>squashfs-tools</I> suite. Its primary function is to display the raw content of a specific file located within a SquashFS filesystem image directly to standard output. Unlike the more comprehensive <I>unsquashfs</I> command, which extracts entire directories or files to the host filesystem, <I>sqfscat</I> provides a quick and efficient way to inspect individual files without the overhead of a full extraction operation. This makes it an invaluable tool for system administrators and developers working with embedded systems, live CDs, or other environments where SquashFS is commonly used for its excellent compression and read-only characteristics. It's particularly useful for quickly examining configuration files, scripts, or log data embedded within an image for diagnostic or debugging purposes, without modifying the host filesystem or needing to mount the SquashFS image. The command outputs the file content, similar to how <I>cat</I> works on regular files, and can be easily piped to other utilities for further processing.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>sqfscat</I> is not a standard, universally available Linux command like <I>ls</I> or <I>cat</I>. It is typically part of the <I>squashfs-tools</I> package and may need to be installed separately or might only be present in specific embedded Linux distributions or build environments. It exclusively works with SquashFS images; it cannot read other archive formats like ZIP, TAR, or ISO. The command itself does not provide options for directly redirecting output to a file or performing complex operations beyond simply printing the file's content to standard output; shell redirection must be used for such purposes.


title: USAGE EXAMPLE
content:
To print the content of <I>/etc/passwd</I> from a SquashFS image named <I>myrootfs.sqfs</I>:<br><br><B>sqfscat myrootfs.sqfs /etc/passwd</B>


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
<I>sqfscat</I> typically exits with a status of <B>0</B> upon successful completion. A non-zero exit status indicates an error, such as the specified SquashFS image not being found, the image being corrupted, or the requested file not existing within the image.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>sqfscat</I> is a utility derived from the broader <I>squashfs-tools</I> project, primarily developed by Phillip Lougher. The SquashFS filesystem itself, along with its associated tools, was created to provide a highly compressed, read-only filesystem ideal for embedded systems, live CDs, and software distribution where space and integrity are critical. <I>sqfscat</I> emerged as a focused tool within this suite, adhering to the Unix philosophy of providing a small, single-purpose utility. Its development is intertwined with the ongoing evolution of the SquashFS filesystem, aiming to offer convenient ways to interact with and inspect these compressed images without full extraction.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sqfstar</b> {-c|--create} <i>&lt;SQUASHFS_FILE&gt; &lt;TAR_FILE&gt;</i> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><b>sqfstar</b> {-x|--extract} <i>&lt;SQUASHFS_FILE&gt; &lt;TAR_FILE&gt;</i> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><b>sqfstar</b> {-h|--help}<br><b>sqfstar</b> {-V|--version}


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c, --create <SQUASHFS> <TAR></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a SquashFS image from the specified tar archive. The first argument is the output SquashFS file, and the second is the input tar file.<br><br><b>-x, --extract <SQUASHFS> <TAR></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts the content of a SquashFS image into a tar archive. The first argument is the input SquashFS file, and the second is the output tar file.<br><br><b>-z, --compression <COMPRESSION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the compression algorithm for the SquashFS image. Supported values include <i>lz4</i>, <i>xz</i>, <i>zstd</i>, <i>gzip</i>, and <i>none</i>.<br><br><b>-k, --block-size <BLOCKSIZE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the compression block size in bytes (e.g., 65536, 131072, 262144, 524288, 1048576). Larger blocks often yield better compression but require more memory.<br><br><b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <b>sqfstar</b> to overwrite the output file if it already exists without prompting.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses progress output during operation, showing only errors or critical information.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, providing more detailed information about the process.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the <b>sqfstar</b> version information and exits.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with usage information and exits.<br><br><b>-p, --processors <NUM></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of processors or threads to use for parallel compression, if supported by the chosen algorithm.<br><br><b>-X <COMP_OPT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes extra, compressor-specific options to the selected compression algorithm (e.g., <i>-Xcompression-level=9</i> for <i>xz</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>sqfstar</b> is a utility from the <i>squashfs-tools-ng</i> project, designed to facilitate the creation of SquashFS images directly from tar archives, and the extraction of existing SquashFS images back into tar archives. It acts as a bridge, allowing for efficient packaging and unpackaging of filesystem content between these two common archive formats.<br><br>Unlike traditional SquashFS tools that operate on directories, <b>sqfstar</b> directly processes tar files, making it suitable for scenarios where data is already packaged or needs to be streamed. It supports various compression algorithms and block sizes, providing flexibility for optimizing image size and performance. This command is particularly useful in embedded systems, live environments, or any context requiring compact, read-only file systems derived from or convertible back into tar archives.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>sqfstar</b> is part of the <i>squashfs-tools-ng</i> project, which is a newer and less ubiquitous alternative to the standard <i>squashfs-tools</i> package found in most Linux distributions. Users should ensure they have the <i>squashfs-tools-ng</i> package installed to use this command. Its streaming capabilities with standard input/output are not explicitly documented in the typical help output but may be inferred from its design for tar file handling. It's crucial to specify the correct operation mode (create or extract) and provide valid file paths for both the SquashFS image and the tar archive.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>sqfstar</b> command emerged as part of the <i>squashfs-tools-ng</i> project, an initiative to provide more modern and flexible tools for handling SquashFS images. While traditional SquashFS utilities like <i>mksquashfs</i> and <i>unsquashfs</i> primarily operate on directories, <i>squashfs-tools-ng</i> introduced <b>sqfstar</b> to specifically address the need for direct interaction between SquashFS images and tar archives.<br><br>This allows for workflows where data is already packaged in a tar format or needs to be output as such, streamlining operations for embedded systems, continuous integration pipelines, or situations requiring efficient streaming of archive content without intermediate directory extraction. Its development reflects an effort to extend SquashFS utility beyond traditional filesystem-to-image conversions.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
sqlite-utils [<B>options</B>] <I>command</I> [<B>arguments</B>]<br><br><I>Common options:</I><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;`--version` &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Show the version and exit.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;`--help` &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; Show this message and exit.<br><I>Example usage:</I><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;`sqlite-utils insert my_database.db my_table data.json --csv`<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;`sqlite-utils my_database.db 'select * from my_table where id = ?' 1`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>`insert`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Insert data into a table from various formats (CSV, JSON).<br><br><b>`upsert`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Insert or update data into a table based on a primary key.<br><br><b>`update`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Update records in a table based on criteria.<br><br><b>`delete`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete records from a table.<br><br><b>`create-table`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a new table with specified columns and types.<br><br><b>`drop-table`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Drop (delete) one or more tables.<br><br><b>`dump`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump the entire database schema and data as SQL.<br><br><b>`schema`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the schema of a database or specific tables.<br><br><b>`tables`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all tables in a database.<br><br><b>`rows`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display rows from a table, with optional filtering and ordering.<br><br><b>`columns`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display columns for a table.<br><br><b>`indexes`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display indexes for a table.<br><br><b>`triggers`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display triggers for a table.<br><br><b>`optimize`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optimize a database (e.g., re-index tables, run `VACUUM`).<br><br><b>`vacuum`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run the `VACUUM` command to reclaim space.<br><br><b>`convert`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Convert columns to a different type or value using a Python function.<br><br><b>`transform`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply various transformations to table data or schema.<br><br><b>`extract`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extract specific values or data based on a pattern from a column.<br><br><b>`enable-fts`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable full-text search (FTS) on a table or specific columns.<br><br><b>`disable-fts`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable full-text search (FTS) on a table.<br><br><b>`search`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform full-text search queries against FTS-enabled tables.<br><br><b>`fkeys`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display foreign keys in the database.<br><br><b>`add-foreign-key`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a foreign key constraint to a table.<br><br><b>`add-column`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a new column to a table.<br><br><b>`rename-column`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rename a column in a table.<br><br><b>`alter-table`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply multiple schema alterations to a table in one go.<br><br><b>`memory`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Analyze memory usage of the database.<br><br><b>`init-plugin`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initialize a new plugin directory for custom commands.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
sqlite-utils is a powerful and versatile command-line tool designed to simplify interactions with SQLite databases. Developed by Simon Willison, it acts as a wrapper around the `sqlite3` library, providing a more user-friendly and feature-rich interface for common database operations. It excels at tasks such as importing data from various formats (CSV, JSON), querying databases, exporting data, managing tables, columns, and indexes, enabling full-text search (FTS), and performing data transformations. Its intuitive subcommands and Pythonic approach make it an invaluable tool for developers, data scientists, and anyone working with SQLite, enabling quick prototyping, data exploration, and automated database management scripts. It's particularly popular for its ease of use in preparing data for Datasette, another tool by Willison for exploring data with a web interface.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Python Dependency:</b> `sqlite-utils` requires Python to be installed on the system, as it is a Python package. It's not a standalone executable like some native Linux commands.<br><b>Installation:</b> It must be installed via `pip` (e.g., `pip install sqlite-utils`) before it can be used, unlike many core Linux utilities which are pre-installed.<br><b>Database File Path:</b> Most subcommands require specifying the path to the SQLite database file as an argument.<br><b>Performance for Very Large Datasets:</b> While generally efficient, operations on extremely large databases (hundreds of gigabytes or billions of rows) might still benefit from direct `sqlite3` CLI or more specialized database tools for optimal performance.


title: INTEGRATION WITH DATASETTE
content:
`sqlite-utils` is often used in conjunction with Datasette. It helps prepare, load, and manage data in SQLite databases, which can then be easily explored and published using Datasette's web interface. This synergy makes for a powerful data exploration and sharing workflow.


title: EXTENSIBILITY
content:
`sqlite-utils` supports plugins, allowing developers to extend its functionality with custom commands or data transformations. This extensibility makes it adaptable to specific data processing needs not covered by its built-in features.


title: DATA TYPE GUESSING
content:
When inserting data from formats like CSV or JSON, `sqlite-utils` intelligently attempts to guess appropriate SQL data types for columns, simplifying the schema creation process. This can be particularly helpful for rapid prototyping and data loading.


title: HISTORY
content:
`sqlite-utils` was created by <B>Simon Willison</B>, a renowned British software developer and co-creator of the Django web framework. It was first released in 2018 as an open-source project, primarily developed to complement his other popular tool, <I>Datasette</I>, which provides a web interface for exploring and publishing data from SQLite databases. Willison designed `sqlite-utils` to be a highly practical, opinionated tool for common SQLite data wrangling tasks, filling a gap between the low-level `sqlite3` command-line interface and full-fledged database management systems. Its development continues actively on GitHub, with a strong emphasis on user-friendliness, robust data handling, and integration with the Python ecosystem. Its adoption has grown significantly within the data science and development communities for its efficiency in preparing and manipulating data for various analytical and application purposes.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sqlmap</b> <i>-u &lt;target URL&gt; [options]</i><br><b>sqlmap</b> <i>-r &lt;request file&gt; [options]</i><br><b>sqlmap</b> <i>[generic options]</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-u</b> <i>URL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Target URL to scan. This is one of the most common ways to specify the target.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>REQUESTFILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Load HTTP request from a stored file. Useful for complex requests or bypassing client-side validation.<br><br><b><b>--data=</b><i>DATA</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;HTTP POST data string. Used when scanning POST-based forms.<br><br><b><b>--cookie=</b><i>COOKIE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;HTTP Cookie header value. Important for authenticated scans.<br><br><b><b>--dbs</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enumerate database management system databases.<br><br><b><b>--tables</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enumerate database tables for a specific database.<br><br><b><b>--columns</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enumerate database table columns for a specific table.<br><br><b><b>--dump</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump database entries. Often used with <b>--dbs</b>, <b>--tables</b>, or <b>--columns</b>.<br><br><b><b>--users</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enumerate database management system users.<br><br><b><b>--current-user</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieve current database management system user.<br><br><b><b>--current-db</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieve current database management system database.<br><br><b><b>--file-read=</b><i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read a file from the back-end DBMS file system.<br><br><b><b>--file-write=</b><i>FILE</i> <b>--file-dest=</b><i>DEST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write a local file onto the back-end DBMS file system.<br><br><b><b>--os-shell</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prompt for an interactive operating system shell on the back-end.<br><br><b><b>--os-cmd=</b><i>CMD</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute an operating system command on the back-end.<br><br><b><b>--level=</b><i>LEVEL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Level of tests to perform (1-5, default 1). Higher levels include more requests.<br><br><b><b>--risk=</b><i>RISK</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Risk of tests to perform (1-3, default 1). Higher risks include more aggressive tests.<br><br><b><b>--technique=</b><i>TECH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;SQL injection techniques to use (B)oolean-based blind, (E)rror-based, (U)NION query, (Q)stacked queries, (T)ime-based blind, (S)tacked queries. Default: BEUST.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> <i>VERBOSE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verbosity level (0-6, default 1). Higher levels provide more output details.<br><br><b><b>--batch</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Never ask for user input, use default behavior.<br><br><b><b>--output-dir=</b><i>DIR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Custom output directory path for logs and dumped data.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>sqlmap</b> is an open-source penetration testing tool that automates the process of detecting and exploiting SQL injection flaws and taking over database servers. It comes with a powerful detection engine and many niche features for the ultimate penetration tester. sqlmap supports a broad range of switches, from database fingerprinting and data fetching to accessing the underlying file system and executing commands on the operating system via out-of-band connections.<br><br>It supports a wide range of database management systems, including <i>MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Microsoft Access, IBM DB2, SQLite, Firebird, Sybase, SAP MaxDB, Informix, HSQLDB,</i> and <i>H2</i>. sqlmap can identify various types of SQL injection techniques like <i>boolean-based blind, time-based blind, error-based, UNION query-based, stacked queries,</i> and <i>out-of-band</i>. Its versatility and extensive feature set make it an essential tool for security professionals for auditing web applications for vulnerabilities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>sqlmap</b> for unauthorized SQL injection attempts is illegal and unethical. Only use this tool on systems for which you have explicit, written permission from the owner. Be aware that running <b>sqlmap</b> can generate a significant amount of network traffic and database activity, potentially impacting the performance and stability of the target system, and leaving extensive logs. It may also trigger intrusion detection/prevention systems (IDS/IPS).


title: ETHICAL USE AND LEGALITY
content:
It is paramount to understand that <b>sqlmap</b> is a powerful tool designed for legitimate security auditing and penetration testing. Its misuse against systems without explicit authorization is illegal and can lead to severe penalties. Always ensure you have proper authorization and understand the legal implications before using <b>sqlmap</b> or any similar security tool.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<b>sqlmap</b> is often pre-installed in penetration testing distributions like <i>Kali Linux</i> or <i>Parrot OS</i>. Alternatively, it can be installed on most Linux systems by cloning its <i>GitHub repository</i> or via <i>Python's pip</i> package manager: <code>pip install sqlmap</code>. Users should always refer to the official documentation for the latest installation instructions.


title: WAF EVASION
content:
<b>sqlmap</b> includes various features to bypass Web Application Firewalls (WAFs) and other security mechanisms. This includes techniques like encoding payloads, using different HTTP methods, adding custom headers, or leveraging proxy chains. While powerful, bypassing WAFs requires a deep understanding of the target's security infrastructure and the specific WAF being used.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>sqlmap</b> was primarily developed by <i>Bernardo Damele A. G.</i> and first released around 2009. It quickly gained recognition within the cybersecurity community for its effectiveness and comprehensive feature set. Over the years, it has been continuously developed and maintained by a dedicated team, adding support for new database technologies, injection techniques, and evasion methods. It has become a standard, go-to tool for web application penetration testers and security auditors worldwide.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>setfacl</b> [-bkndRLP] { <i>-m|-x acl_entries</i> } <i>file</i> ...<br><b>setfacl</b> [-bkndRLP] { <i>-M|-X acl_file</i> } <i>file</i> ...<br><b>setfacl</b> [-bkndRLP] <i>-s acl_entries</i> <i>file</i> ...<br><b>setfacl</b> [-bkndRLP] <i>-b</i> <i>file</i> ...<br><b>setfacl</b> [-bkndRLP] <i>-k</i> <i>file</i> ...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-m</i>, <i>--modify</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Modify the ACL of a file(s). ACL entries are specified as <i>type:name:permissions</i>.<br><br><b><i>-x</i>, <i>--remove</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove specified ACL entries from a file(s). ACL entries are specified as <i>type:name</i>.<br><br><b><i>-b</i>, <i>--remove-all</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove all extended ACL entries. Only the base owner, group, and others permissions remain.<br><br><b><i>-k</i>, <i>--remove-default</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove the default ACL from a directory, if it exists.<br><br><b><i>-M</i>, <i>--file=-</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read ACL entries to modify from a specified file or standard input (if '-' is used).<br><br><b><i>-X</i>, <i>--file=-</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read ACL entries to remove from a specified file or standard input (if '-' is used).<br><br><b><i>-s</i>, <i>--set</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the ACL of a file(s), completely replacing any existing ACL entries with the new ones provided.<br><br><b><i>-d</i>, <i>--default</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply operations to the <i>default ACL</i> of a directory. New files/subdirectories inherit these.<br><br><b><i>-R</i>, <i>--recursive</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply operations recursively to files and subdirectories within a given path.<br><br><b><i>-n</i>, <i>--no-mask</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not recalculate the <i>effective rights mask</i>. Use with caution as it can lead to unexpected permissions.<br><br><b><i>-P</i>, <i>--physical</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate on the physical files/directories rather than following symbolic links.<br><br><b><i>--test</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Test mode. Show what would be done without actually modifying ACLs.<br><br><b><i>--help</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help information for the command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>setfacl</b> allows users to set, modify, or remove Access Control Lists (ACLs) for files and directories. ACLs provide a more granular permission system than traditional Unix permissions (owner, group, others), enabling specific permissions for multiple individual users or groups on a single file or directory. This command is part of the <i>acl</i> package, which extends the standard Unix permission model. It's commonly used to manage shared resources where complex permission requirements exist, allowing fine-grained control over access rights beyond the basic owner/group/other triplet. <b>setfacl</b> can be used to add new ACL entries, modify existing ones, or remove them entirely, including default ACLs for directories.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Filesystem support: ACLs must be enabled and mounted with the <i>acl</i> option on the filesystem (e.g., ext2/3/4, XFS, Btrfs).<br>Interaction with traditional permissions: The <i>ACL mask</i> entry limits the effective permissions for all user, group, and named group entries, ensuring they don't exceed what is allowed by the traditional group permission bits.<br>Default ACLs: Only apply to directories and affect newly created files/subdirectories within them, not existing ones.


title: ACL ENTRY FORMAT
content:
ACL entries are typically specified in the format: <i>type:name:permissions</i>.<br>Types include: <i>u</i> for a named user, <i>g</i> for a named group, <i>o</i> for others, and <i>m</i> for the <i>ACL mask</i> entry.<br><i>name</i> is a username or group name (or their numerical IDs).<br><i>permissions</i> are specified using <i>r</i> (read), <i>w</i> (write), <i>x</i> (execute), or their octal equivalents (e.g., 7 for rwx).


title: ACL MASK ENTRY
content:
The <i>ACL mask</i> entry is crucial. It defines the maximum effective permissions for all named user entries, named group entries, and the owning group entry. When an ACL is modified, <b>setfacl</b> typically adjusts the mask automatically unless the <i>-n</i> (<i>--no-mask</i>) option is used. The effective permissions for any of these entries will be the intersection of their specified permissions and the mask permissions.


title: HISTORY
content:
Access Control Lists (ACLs) were formalized in drafts of the POSIX.1e standard in the 1990s, aiming to extend traditional Unix permissions. Linux adopted these ACLs, with stable support integrated into the kernel around version 2.6. <b>setfacl</b> and <b>getfacl</b> became the standard utilities for managing these extended file attributes on Linux systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s [[<I>domain</I>:]<I>bus</I>:]<I>device</I>[.<I>func</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the target PCI device by its address in the format <i>[[domain:]bus:]device[.func]</i>. This is the most common way to specify a device.<br><br><b>-d [<I>vendor</I>]:[<I>device</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects devices by matching their PCI Vendor ID and/or Device ID.<br><br><b>-P <I>class</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects devices belonging to a specified PCI class code.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about operations.<br><br><b><I>offset</I>.<I>size</I>=<I>value</I>[/<I>mask</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a write operation to a register. <I>offset</I> is the hexadecimal register address. <I>size</I> is B (byte), W (word), or L (long word). <I>value</I> is the hexadecimal data to write. An optional <I>mask</I> can be used for bitwise operations.<br><br><b><I>offset</I>.<I>size</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a read operation from a register. <I>offset</I> is the hexadecimal register address. <I>size</I> is B (byte), W (word), or L (long word).<br><br><b>--dumpregs</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps all known PCI configuration registers for the selected devices.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>setpci</i> is a powerful command-line utility used for querying and configuring PCI device configuration registers directly. It allows users to read and write arbitrary bytes, words, or long words in a PCI device's configuration space. This tool is invaluable for low-level hardware debugging, performance tuning, and specific device initialization tasks that go beyond standard driver capabilities.<br><br>Due to its direct interaction with hardware registers, <i>setpci</i> requires root privileges. Incorrect usage can lead to system instability, crashes, or data corruption, as it bypasses the operating system's normal hardware abstraction layers. Users typically need a good understanding of PCI architecture and device-specific register layouts (often found in datasheets) to use it effectively and safely.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires root privileges to execute. Incorrect use can lead to system instability, crashes, data loss, or render hardware unusable until a reboot. Users should possess a thorough understanding of PCI architecture and device-specific register functions before attempting to modify values. Always back up critical data before performing low-level hardware manipulations.


title: SECURITY IMPLICATIONS
content:
Due to its ability to directly manipulate hardware settings, <i>setpci</i> poses a significant security risk if used by unauthorized users. It can potentially be exploited to bypass security measures, cause denial-of-service, or introduce vulnerabilities. Access to this command should be strictly limited to trusted system administrators or developers.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>setpci</i> is part of the <i>pciutils</i> package, a collection of utilities for Linux that inspect and manipulate PCI devices. Developed and maintained over many years, it has become a standard component in the Linux ecosystem for low-level PCI device management and debugging. Its development closely tracks changes in PCI specifications and hardware advancements, ensuring compatibility and functionality across a wide range of devices.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sfddiff</b> [options] <device1> <device2><br><b>sfddiff</b> [options] <device> <file><br><b>sfddiff</b> [options] <file1> <file2>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses non-error messages, showing only the comparison output or errors.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints more verbose information about the comparison process.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>sfddiff</i> is a command-line utility used to compare the partition table layouts of two specified block devices or disk image files. It provides a <i>diff</i>-like output, highlighting the differences in partitioning schemes, partition types, sizes, and bootable flags.<br><br>This tool is particularly useful for verifying disk cloning operations, auditing server configurations, or understanding changes made to disk partitions over time. It can read partition information directly from devices like <b>/dev/sda</b> or from backup files created by tools like <i>sfdisk</i>. Its output is designed to be easily parsable and helps administrators quickly identify discrepancies between disk layouts.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>sfddiff</i> typically compares the raw partition table data, not the file systems within partitions.<br><br>For more advanced or robust partition management and comparison, the <b>sfdisk --diff</b> command (introduced in <i>util-linux</i> versions 2.25 and later) is often preferred as it offers more features and better integration with <i>sfdisk</i>'s capabilities. <i>sfddiff</i> might be considered a simpler or legacy tool in comparison.<br><br>It requires read access to the block devices or files being compared, and using it on a live system without understanding its implications is not recommended.


title: OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
<i>sfddiff</i> outputs differences in a format similar to the standard <i>diff</i> utility, making it familiar to users accustomed to comparing text files. It highlights lines where partition details vary, indicating additions, deletions, or modifications to partition entries.


title: INPUT TYPES
content:
The command can compare two block devices (e.g., <b>/dev/sda</b> and <b>/dev/sdb</b>), two files containing partition table dumps (e.g., created by <b>sfdisk -d</b>), or a combination of a device and a file.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>sfddiff</i> has been part of the <i>util-linux</i> package for a considerable time, serving as a dedicated utility for comparing disk partition layouts. While <i>sfdisk</i> itself underwent significant development, including the introduction of the <b>sfdisk --diff</b> option in <i>util-linux</i> version 2.25 (around 2014-2015) to integrate comparison functionality directly into <i>sfdisk</i>, <i>sfddiff</i> persists as a standalone, simpler tool for this specific task. Its usage generally predates the more feature-rich <b>sfdisk --diff</b> subcommand.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--sdk</b> <i>&lt;version&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Sailfish OS SDK version to associate with the new or existing build target/engine (e.g., '4.5.0.18').<br><br><b><b>--arch</b> <i>&lt;architecture&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the target architecture for the build environment (e.g., 'armv7hl', 'i486', 'aarch64'). Essential for cross-compilation.<br><br><b><b>--create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly instructs the command to create a new build target or SDK engine with the specified name and options.<br><br><b><b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all currently configured build targets and SDK engines, showing their names, associated SDK versions, and architectures.<br><br><b><b>--delete</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes the specified build target or SDK engine from the configuration. This action is irreversible for the environment.<br><br><b><b>--show-config</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the detailed configuration for a specified build target or SDK engine, including paths and settings.<br><br><b><b>--default</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the newly created or specified build target/engine as the default for subsequent <b>sfdk build</b> commands.<br><br><b><i>TARGET_OR_ENGINE_NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The unique name for the build target or SDK engine being initialized, listed, deleted, or configured. Required for creation and specific operations.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>sfdk build-init</i> is a crucial command within the Sailfish OS SDK, designed for setting up and managing build environments. It allows developers to initialize specific build targets (e.g., for different architectures like <b>armv7hl</b> or <b>i486</b>) or to create and configure SDK build engines. This command prepares the necessary environment for compiling applications and packages for Sailfish OS, ensuring compatibility with the target device or emulator.<br><br>It streamlines the initial setup phase, enabling developers to quickly switch between different SDK versions or hardware targets without manual configuration of build tools and dependencies. It's an essential first step before building projects with <b>sfdk build</b> or entering the <b>sfdk shell</b>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
This command requires a pre-installed and functional Sailfish OS SDK. It modifies system-wide or user-specific SDK configurations, thus requiring appropriate file system permissions. Creating new SDK instances or targets can consume significant disk space and may involve downloading large components, requiring an active internet connection. Remember that <b>sfdk build-init</b> is a subcommand and must be invoked via the main <b>sfdk</b> wrapper.


title: USAGE CONTEXT
content:
It's important to note that <b>sfdk-build-init</b> is not typically run as a standalone executable. Instead, it is invoked as a subcommand of the main <b>sfdk</b> tool, e.g., <b>sfdk build-init</b>. The <b>sfdk</b> wrapper manages the environment and directs commands to the appropriate SDK tools.


title: TARGET VS. ENGINE
content:
In the context of <b>sfdk build-init</b>, a 'build target' typically refers to an environment configured for a specific device architecture (e.g., <i>armv7hl</i> for a phone), allowing compilation for that platform. An 'SDK build engine' usually refers to a specific version of the Sailfish OS SDK itself, potentially allowing multiple SDK versions to be installed and managed side-by-side. The command helps set up both.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>sfdk</b> command-line tool, including its <b>build-init</b> subcommand, is a core component of the Sailfish OS SDK. It evolved from earlier SDK setups for platforms like MeeGo, designed to streamline cross-compilation and application development for mobile devices. <b>build-init</b> specifically abstracts complex configurations related to scratchbox2 (sb2) and QEMU, making it easier for developers to manage multiple SDK versions and hardware targets without deep knowledge of the underlying build systems.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
sh [options] [script_file] [arguments...]<br>sh [options] -c command_string [command_name [arguments...]]<br>sh [options] -s [arguments...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c <command_string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads commands from the provided <command_string> instead of standard input or a file.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads commands from standard input. If this option is not specified and no <script_file> is given, the shell behaves as if -s was specified.<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Makes the shell interactive, meaning it prompts for input and handles job control.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs the shell in a restricted mode. This typically disables some functionalities for security reasons, such as changing directories or executing commands with full path names.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verbose mode. Prints shell input lines as they are read.<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Trace mode. Prints commands and their arguments as they are executed, preceded by the value of the PS4 variable.<br><br><b>-e</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exits immediately if a command exits with a non-zero status. Useful for robust scripting.<br><br><b>-u</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats unset variables as an error. Causes the shell to exit or report an error if it encounters an unset variable during expansion.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>sh</b> command invokes the Bourne shell, a fundamental command language interpreter for Unix-like operating systems. On most modern Linux distributions, <b>sh</b> is typically a symbolic link to another shell, such as <b>Bash</b> (Bourne Again SHell) or <b>Dash</b> (Debian Almquist SHell), providing a POSIX-compliant environment.<br><br>As a shell, <b>sh</b> allows users to execute commands, automate tasks through scripts, and manage processes. It reads and executes commands from standard input, a file, or as arguments to its invocation. Its core functionalities include command execution, variable management, I/O redirection, pipeline construction, and control flow constructs like <i>if</i>, <i>for</i>, and <i>while</i> loops.<br><br><b>sh</b> is widely used for system scripting because its syntax forms the basis of the POSIX shell standard, ensuring a high degree of portability across different Unix and Linux systems. While not always the most feature-rich for interactive use compared to shells like Bash or Zsh, its consistency and minimal overhead make it ideal for system startup scripts and portable shell scripts.


